Revelation 21:16 — Word Study
N1904καὶ ἡ πόλις τετράγωνος κεῖται, καὶ τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς τοσοῦτόν ἐστίν ὅσον καὶ τὸ πλάτος. καὶ ἐμέτρησεν τὴν πόλιν τῷ καλάμῳ ἐπὶ σταδίων δώδεκα χιλιάδων δώδεκα, τὸ μῆκος καὶ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τὸ ὕψος αὐτῆς ἴσα ἐστίν.
BSAAndkai theho citypolis [lying in a foursquare shape] foursquaretetragōnos△ lies,keimai▸ andkai theho lengthmēkos [extent, the measure of its distance] of itautos so great is [size, extent] [the] same ashosos also theho width.platos [breadth, the measure of its broadness] Andkai he measuredmetreō▸ theho citypolis [town, with walls] with theho reedkalamos [reed, a measuring stick] atepi stadiastadios [furlongs, a unit of distance] twelvedōdeka thousandchilias twelve [was]dōdeka theho lengthmēkos [extent, the measure of its distance] andkai theho breadthplatos [breadth, the measure of its broadness] andkai theho heighthupsos [elevation, loftiness] of itautos equalisos are.eimi▸
| Greek | English | Parsing |
|---|---|---|
| καὶ | And | Conjunction |
| ἡ | the | Article, nominative, singular |
| πόλις | city | Noun, nominative, singular |
| τετράγωνος | foursquare | Adjective, nominative, singular |
| κεῖται, | lies, | Verb, present, no voice stated |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| τὸ | the | Article, nominative, singular |
| μῆκος | length | Noun, nominative, singular |
| αὐτῆς | of it | Personal pronoun, genitive, singular |
| τοσοῦτόν | so great | |
| ἐστίν | is | |
| ὅσον | [the] same as | Correlative pronoun, nominative, singular |
| καὶ | also | |
| τὸ | the | Article, nominative, singular |
| πλάτος. | width. | Noun, nominative, singular |
| καὶ | And | Conjunction |
| ἐμέτρησεν | he measured | Verb, aorist, active |
| τὴν | the | Article, accusative, singular |
| πόλιν | city | Noun, accusative, singular |
| τῷ | with the | Article, dative, singular |
| καλάμῳ | reed | Noun, dative, singular |
| ἐπὶ | at | Preposition |
| σταδίων | stadia | Noun, accusative, plural |
| δώδεκα | twelve | Adjective, nominative |
| χιλιάδων | thousand | Noun, genitive, plural |
| δώδεκα, | twelve [was] | Adjective, nominative |
| τὸ | the | Article, nominative, singular |
| μῆκος | length | Noun, nominative, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| τὸ | the | Article, nominative, singular |
| πλάτος | breadth | Noun, nominative, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| τὸ | the | Article, nominative, singular |
| ὕψος | height | Noun, nominative, singular |
| αὐτῆς | of it | Personal pronoun, genitive, singular |
| ἴσα | equal | Adjective, nominative, plural |
| ἐστίν. | are. | Verb, present, active |
Every word in the verse. Click a row to open it in the panel on the left.
| BSB | The city lies foursquare, with its width the same as its length. And he measured the city with the rod, and all its dimensions were equal—12,000 stadia in length and width and height. |
| KJV | And the city lieth foursquare, and the length is as large as the breadth: and he measured the city with the reed, twelve thousand furlongs. The length and the breadth and the height of it are equal. |
| ASV | And the city lieth foursquare, and the length thereof is as great as the breadth: and he measured the city with the reed, twelve thousand furlongs: the length and the breadth and the height thereof are equal. |
| YLT | and the city lieth square, and the length of it is as great as the breadth; and he did measure the city with the reed — furlongs twelve thousand; the length, and the breadth, and the height, of it are equal; |
| WEB | The city is square. Its length is as great as its width. He measured the city with the reed: twelve thousand twelve stadia. Its length, width, and height are equal. |
| BBE | And the town is square, as wide as it is long; and he took the measure of the town with the rod, one thousand and five hundred miles: it is equally long and wide and high. |
Where they part company is πόλις — see How Translations Differ.
The sentence consists of a main clause followed by several subordinate phrases that elaborate on the city's dimensions and the measuring action.
8 commentators on this verse
Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them ›
clause
subjectὁ
verbκεῖμαι
The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
1 of 37 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.
Bars are logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.
Deep Study — Revelation 21:16
Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.
Context — The Dimensions of the New Jerusalemgenerated
Revelation 21:16 describes the New Jerusalem, a city of God, showcasing its perfect square shape with equal dimensions of length, width, and height. This description follows a series of measurements taken by an angel, emphasizing the divine order and perfection of the heavenly city, which is further linked to the prophetic visions in Ezekiel 48:17–18.
Cross References
| Reference | Text (BSB) | |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Ezekiel 48:17–18 | The pastureland of the city will extend 250 cubits to the north, 250 cubits to the south, 250 cubits to the east, and 250 cubits to the west. |
| 2 | Ezekiel 48:8–19 | Bordering the territory of Judah, from east to west, will be the portion you are to set apart. It will be 25,000 cubits wide, and the length of a tribal portion from east to west. In the center will be the sanctuary. |
The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 2 references, hung on the phrase they belong to
The Key Word — τετράγωνος, tetragōnosgenerated
The word τετράγωνος (tetragōnos) is an adjective meaning 'square' or 'four-cornered,' derived from the roots for 'four' and 'angle.' It indicates a shape with equal sides, which is significant in the context of the New Jerusalem's design.
The use of this term highlights the geometric perfection of the city, suggesting not only its physical dimensions but also a metaphorical completeness, reflecting God's divine order in creation.
How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated
The verse is presented in the Berean Standard Bible, which uses foursquare to describe the city's shape, aligning with the KJV and ASV that also emphasize the square nature of the city.
Other translations like the WEB and BBE use square and town respectively, indicating a slight variation in terminology while conveying the same essential meaning of a city with equal dimensions.
Sentence Structuregenerated
The main verb governing the sentence is κεῖται, lies, which connects to several phrases describing the city. The structure includes a predicate adjective, a subject noun phrase, and multiple clauses that elaborate on the city's measurements.
The construction of the sentence showcases the relationship between the city's dimensions and the measuring action, emphasizing the precision of the measurements taken.
Septuagint Backgroundgenerated
πόλις occurs in the Septuagint as a translation for the Hebrew word עִיר (ir), meaning 'city.' This connection underscores the continuity of the concept of a city from the Old Testament to the New Testament, particularly in the context of divine cities.
τετράγωνος does not have a direct LXX counterpart but aligns with the Hebrew concept of a city with defined boundaries, reflecting the structured nature of God's dwelling place.
In plain words — the whole versegenerated
Revelation 21:16 tells us that the New Jerusalem is a city that is perfectly square, with equal lengths for its sides. An angel measures this city using a rod, and the measurements reveal that it is 12,000 stadia long, wide, and high, emphasizing its divine design and perfection.
Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated
Foursquare means that the city has equal lengths on all sides, forming a perfect square shape, which symbolizes completeness and perfection.
The measurement signifies divine order and perfection in God's design for the New Jerusalem, reflecting His nature and the intended harmony of the heavenly realm.
The description of the New Jerusalem draws parallels with the measurements and designs found in the Old Testament, particularly in Ezekiel's visions of a restored city.
The precise dimensions remind us of God's sovereignty and the perfect order of His creation, encouraging us to reflect on the nature of His kingdom.
Reflection Questionsgenerated
- What does the square shape of the New Jerusalem symbolize for believers?
- How can understanding the measurements of the city deepen our appreciation for God's design?
- In what ways does the concept of divine order manifest in our lives today?
- How does this vision of the New Jerusalem inspire hope for the future?
The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it
Early church writers reflect on the dimensions of the New Jerusalem, drawing connections to its divine significance and structure.
She said to me, "Lo! do you not see opposite to you a great tower, built upon the waters, of splendid square stones?" For the tower was built square by those six young men who had come with her.Early Church Fathers on Revelation 21 →
The city which he says is squared, he says also is resplendent with gold and precious stones, and has a sacred street, and a river through the midst of it, and the tree of life on either side,Early Church Fathers on Revelation 21 →
The apostle certainly recalls the dimension of the city when he says, “according to the measure of Christ’s gift,” and again, “To me, though I am the least of all the saints, this grace was given to me,Early Church Fathers on Revelation 21 →
Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse
Each of these wrote on Revelation 21:16 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.
John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire BibleAnd the city lieth four square,.... To the four corners of the world, from whence its inhabitants come, and denotes the regularity, uniformity, perfection, and immovableness of it.
Read John Gill on Revelation 21 →Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's CommentaryAnd the city lieth foursquare, and the length is as large as the breadth: and he measured the city with the reed, twelve thousand furlongs. The length and the breadth and the height of it are equal.
Read Robert Jamieson on Revelation 21 →Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy BibleThe church militant, measured by the reed of the word, is unequal in its parts; some parts of it are purer than others; but in the new Jerusalem all parts shall be equal in perfection and purity, as all the sides of a thing four square are equal.
Read Matthew Poole on Revelation 21 →John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments16 And the city lieth foursquare, and the length is as large as the breadth: and he measured the city with the reed, twelve thousand furlongs. The length and the breadth and the height of it are equal. Ver. 16. And the city lieth four square] So was Babylon of old (as Herodotus describeth it), which yet was taken by Cyrus, Alexander, and various other enemies. Heaven also is taken, but by another kind of violence than by force of arms. The solid square whereby it is here set forth commends it to us: 1. For stable and unshaken, Hebrews 12:28. Immota manet, as it is said of Venice, which yet stands in the sea, and hath but one street that is not daily overflowed (the Venetian motto is, Nec…
Read John Trapp on Revelation 21 →Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers(16) And the city lieth foursquare . . .—The city is foursquare, because the length and breadth are equal; but it is added that the height also is equal to the length and breadth, the city thus presents the symbol of perfect symmetry; this is all that is needed. Many interpreters are nervously anxious about the monstrous appearance of a city whose walls measured three thousand stadii (the word rendered “furlongs” is properly stadii); but there is no need to be nervous about the symbols; the city is not designed, any more than the vision of Revelation 4, or the vision of Ezekiel (Ezekiel 1) to be represented by painting to the eye: the attempt to do so only ends in the production of…
Read Charles John Ellicott on Revelation 21 →AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the BibleVerse 16. The city lieth foursquare] Each side was equal, consequently the length and breadth were equal; and its height is here said to be equal to its length. It is hard to say how this should be understood. It cannot mean the height of the buildings, nor of the walls, for neither houses nor walls could be twelve thousand furlongs in height; some think this means the distance from the plain country to the place where the city stood. But what need is there of attempting to determine such measures in such a visionary representation? The quadrangular form intimates its perfection and stability, for the square figure was a figure of perfection among the Greeks; αντρτετραγωνος, the square or…
Read AdamClarke on Revelation 21 →CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges16. he measured the city] It is doubtful whether this is the measurement of the side of the square, or of the whole circumference. The twelve-fold measure is in favour of the former view: thus from each gate to the next would be 1000 furlongs; the outmost gate on each side being 500 from the angle.with the reed] He has not, as in the parallel passages of Ezekiel and Zechariah, a line for the long measurements (like our “chains” and “poles”).twelve thousand furlongs] The construction is peculiar, but the sense clear. The measure would be about 1378 English miles, making the City 344 miles square, according to the lower computation.the length and the breadth and the height of it are equal] It…
Read Cambridge on Revelation 21 →Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the BibleAnd the city lieth four-square - It was an exact square. That is, there was nothing irregular about it; there were no crooked walls; there was no jutting out, and no indentation in the walls, as if
Read Albert Barnes on Revelation 21 →The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company
Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.
Modern formal
The city lies foursquare, with its width the same as its length. And he measured the city with the rod, and all its dimensions were equal—12,000 stadia in length and width and height.
The city is square. Its length is as great as its width. He measured the city with the reed: twelve thousand twelve stadia. Its length, width, and height are equal.
The city lies foursquare, with its width the same as its length. And he measured the city with the rod, and all its dimensions were equal—12,000 stadia in length and width and height.
Now the city is laid out as a square, its length and width the same. He measured the city with the measuring rod at fourteen hundred miles (its length and width and height are equal).
Tyndale line
And the city lieth foursquare, and the length is as large as the breadth: and he measured the city with the reed, twelve thousand furlongs. The length and the breadth and the height of it are equal.
And the city lieth foursquare, and the length thereof is as great as the breadth: and he measured the city with the reed, twelve thousand furlongs: the length and the breadth and the height thereof are equal.
And the city lieth foursquare, and the length thereof is as great as the breadth: and he measured the city with the reed, twelve thousand furlongs: the length and the breadth and the height thereof are equal.
And the city lieth foursquare, and the length is as large as the breadth: and he measured the city with the reed, twelve thousand furlongs. The length and the breadth and the hight of it are equal.
And the citie laie foure square, and the length is as large as the bredth of it, and he measured the citie with the reede, twelue thousande furlongs: and the length, and the bredth, and the height of it are equall.
Strictly literal
And the city lies four-square, and its length [is] as much as the breadth. And he measured the city with the reed — twelve thousand stadia: the length and the breadth and height of it are equal.
and the city lieth square, and the length of it is as great as the breadth; and he did measure the city with the reed — furlongs twelve thousand; the length, and the breadth, and the height, of it are equal;
and the city lies square, and the length of it is as great as the breadth; and he measured the city with the reed—twelve thousand stadia; the length, and the breadth, and the height of it are equal.
The city was laid out in a square; its length was the same as its width. He measured the city with the measuring rod, twelve thousand stadia in length (its length, width, and height were the same).
From the Latin
And the city lieth in a foursquare, and the length thereof is as great as the breadth: and he measured the city with the golden reed for twelve thousand furlongs, and the length and the height and the breadth thereof are equal.
Simplified
The city was square. The length was the same as the width. He measured the city with the rod, it was 12,000 furlongs. The length, width, and height were all the same.
And the town is square, as wide as it is long; and he took the measure of the town with the rod, one thousand and five hundred miles: it is equally long and wide and high.
Word by word, the decisions they made
Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.
The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank
This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.
Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.
The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac
Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.
Et civitas in quadro posita est, et longitudo ejus tanta est quanta et latitudo : et mensus est civitatem de arundine aurea per stadia duodecim millia : et longitudo, et altitudo, et latitudo ejus æqualia sunt.
Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.
ܘܡܕܝܢܬܐ ܡܪܒܥܐܝܬ ܣܝܡܐ ܘܐܘܪܟܗ ܐܝܟ ܦܬܝܗ ܘܡܫܚܗ ܠܡܕܝܢܬܐ ܒܩܢܝܐ ܥܠ ܬܪܥܣܪ ܐܠܦܝܢ ܐܣܛܕܘܬܐ ܐܘܪܟܗ ܘܦܬܝܗ ܘܪܘܡܗ ܫܘܝܢ ܐܢܘܢ
The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.
Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.
The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say
Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.
καὶ ἡ πόλις τετράγωνος κεῖται, καὶ τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς — — ὅσον καὶ τὸ πλάτος. καὶ ἐμέτρησεν τὴν πόλιν τῷ καλάμῳ ἐπὶ σταδίων δώδεκα χιλιάδων — τὸ μῆκος καὶ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τὸ ὕψος αὐτῆς ἴσα ἐστίν.
The standard critical text of the New Testament.
καὶ ἡ πόλις τετράγωνος κεῖται, καὶ τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς — — ὅσον καὶ τὸ πλάτος. καὶ ἐμέτρησεν τὴν πόλιν τῷ καλάμῳ ἐπὶ σταδίων δώδεκα χιλιάδων — τὸ μῆκος καὶ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τὸ ὕψος αὐτῆς ἴσα ἐστίν.
The previous edition, still widely cited.
καὶ ἡ πόλις τετράγωνος κεῖται, καὶ τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς — — ὅσον — τὸ πλάτος. καὶ ἐμέτρησεν τὴν πόλιν τῷ καλάμῳ ἐπὶ — δώδεκα χιλιάδων — τὸ μῆκος καὶ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τὸ ὕψος αὐτῆς ἴσα ἐστίν.
The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.
καὶ ἡ πόλις τετράγωνος κεῖται, καὶ τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς — — ὅσον — τὸ πλάτος. καὶ ἐμέτρησεν τὴν πόλιν τῷ καλάμῳ ἐπὶ σταδίων δώδεκα χιλιάδων — τὸ μῆκος καὶ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τὸ ὕψος αὐτῆς ἴσα ἐστίν.
The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.
καὶ ἡ πόλις τετράγωνος κεῖται, καὶ τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς — — ὅσον — τὸ πλάτος. καὶ ἐμέτρησεν τὴν πόλιν τῷ καλάμῳ ἐπὶ — δώδεκα χιλιάδων — τὸ μῆκος καὶ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τὸ ὕψος αὐτῆς ἴσα ἐστίν.
An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.
καὶ ἡ πόλις τετράγωνος κεῖται, καὶ τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς — — ὅσον καὶ τὸ πλάτος. καὶ ἐμέτρησεν τὴν πόλιν τῷ καλάμῳ ἐπὶ — δώδεκα χιλιάδων — τὸ μῆκος καὶ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τὸ ὕψος αὐτῆς ἴσα ἐστίν.
A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.
καὶ ἡ πόλις τετράγωνος κεῖται, καὶ τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς — — ὅσον — τὸ πλάτος. καὶ ἐμέτρησεν τὴν πόλιν τῷ καλάμῳ ἐπὶ — δώδεκα χιλιάδων δώδεκα, τὸ μῆκος καὶ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τὸ ὕψος αὐτῆς ἴσα ἐστίν.
The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.
καὶ ἡ πόλις τετράγωνος κεῖται, καὶ τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς τοσοῦτόν ἐστίν ὅσον καὶ τὸ πλάτος. καὶ ἐμέτρησεν τὴν πόλιν τῷ καλάμῳ ἐπὶ σταδίων δώδεκα χιλιάδων — τὸ μῆκος καὶ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τὸ ὕψος αὐτῆς ἴσα ἐστίν.
The printed tradition behind the King James Version.
A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.
Word by word, across the editions
| Word | Editions carrying it | Missing from |
|---|---|---|
| τοσοῦτόν so great | TR | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, Byz |
| ἐστίν is | TR | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, Byz |
| καὶ also | NA28, NA27, Tyn, TR | SBL, WH, Treg, Byz |
| σταδίων stadia | NA28, NA27, WH, TR | SBL, Treg, Tyn, Byz |
| δώδεκα, twelve [was] | Byz | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, TR |
The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with
This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.
Lexicons — every word in Revelation 21:16
One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.
Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSF — Article · nominative · singular · femininenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-NSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
πόλις (polis) means 'city' and can refer to an enclosed town or the inhabitants of a city. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in the context of specific cities like Jerusalem or as a general term for urban areas. The word is derived from various dialects and has a rich history in classical literature, indicating both physical locations and the concept of citizenship.
πόλις, -εως, ἡ,
[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for עִיר;]
a city: Mt 2:23, Mk 1:45, Lk 4:29, Jo 4:8, al. mult.; opp. to κῶμαι (κ. καὶ ἀγροί), Mt 9:35 10:11, Mk 6:56, Lk 8:1 13:22; c. nom. propr. in appos. (cl.), Ac 11:5 16:14; c. id. in gen. appos. (Bl., § 35, 5), Ac 8:5, II Pe 2:6; gen., of the region, Lk 1:26 4:31, Jo 4:5; of the inhabitants,
πόλις, -ews, 7, (πέλομαι, to dwell [or rather denoting originally ‘fulness,’ ‘ throng’; allied with Lat. pleo, plebs, ete.; ef. Curtius p. 79 and §374; Vanitek p. 499; (otherwise Fick i. 138)]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for ~y, besides for 7 Pp, WH (8 ate), ete., a city; a. univ.: Mt. ii. 23; Mk.i.45; Lk. iv. 29; Jn. xi.54; Acts vy. 16, and very often in the historical bks. of the N. T. ; κατὰ τὴν πόλιν, through the city [A. V. in; see xara, IT. 1 a.], Acts xxiv. 12; κατὰ πόλιν, κατὰ πόλεις, see κατά, IT. 3 a. a. p. 328"; opp. to κῶμαι, Mt. ix. 35; x.11; Lk. viii. 1; xiii. 22; to κῶμαι καὶ aypot, Mk. vi. 56; ἡ ἰδία πόλις, see ἴδιος, 1 Ὁ. p. 297"; πόλις with the gen. of a pers. one’s native city, Lk. ii. 4,11; Jn.i.44 (45); or the city in which one lives, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. iv. 29; x. 11; Acts xvi. 20; Rev. xvi. 19; Jerusalem is called, on account of the temple erected there, πόλις…
Read the full entry →πόλις. In the second Logia fragment, P Oxy IV. 6542, Blass suggested the restoration ὑμεῖς ἐστὲ mrd[Ats (sc. τοῦ θεοῦ), and is followed by White (Sayzzgs, p. 9). It may be worth while to note that this ancient by-form of πόλις occurs in three ostraca of the reign of Caligula as a proper name, Ostr 380! διαγεγρά(φηκεν) Πτόλις Ψενεν(ούφιος), 7. 3811, 3821, and similarly in PSI IV. 317! (a.p. 95) ᾿Ασκληπιάδης Πτόλιδι τῶι φιλτάτωι χαίρειν. This recalls πολιτάρχης 5 the fact that πτόλεμος also survived in the royal name ἹΠτολεμαῖος. The distributive force which πόλις has in several Lucan passages (Ac 154 a/.) and in Tit 1° is to be set against the very different meaning of the phrase in sundry documents of the new collection from Alexandria (reign of Augustus). Schubart, who edits the documents in BGU IV., notes (Archiv v. p. 38) that in a good many papers relating to the hire of a nurse…
Read the full entry →πόλις (polis) — city.
πόλις,
Epic dialect also πτόλις (found sometimes in Trag. etc., see at {πτόλις}), ἡ: Epic dialect forms, accusative singular πόληα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; genitive πόλιος or πτόλιος, [Refs 8th c.BC+] P.(scanned ?~X ?~X ?~X ¯ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect forms, genitive πόλεως [Refs 6th c.BC+]; dative mostly πόλει, but πόλῑ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative πόλῑς [Refs]: Doric dialect genitive singular πόλιος [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; dative singular πόλι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; dative plural πολίεσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πολίεσσι Foed.Lac. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect πόλιθι [Refs]: Aeolic dialect genitive πόλιος [Refs 7th c.BC+] disyllable (as also in Comedy texts, except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Attic dialect dual πόλη [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—city, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. ἄκρη, ἀκροτάτη, ={ἀκρόπολις}, the citadel, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; which at Athens also was in early times called…
Read the full entry →πόλις
polis
probably from the same as 4171, or perhaps from 4183; a town
(properly, with walls, of greater or less size):--city.
see GREEK for 4183
see GREEK for 4171
πόλις, εως, ἡ
n.f.
a city
πόλις polis 162x
a city, an enclosed and walled town, Mt. 10:5, 11; 11:1; meton. the inhabitants of a city, Mt. 8:34; 10:15; with a gen. of person, or a personal pronoun, the city of any one, the city of one’s birth or residence, Mt. 9:1; Lk. 2:4, 11; ἡ πόλις, the city, κατ’ ἐξοχήν, Jerusalem, Mt. 21:18; 28:11; met. a place of permanent residence, abode, home, Heb. 11:10, 16; 13:14. The frequency count does not include its occurrence in the name Νέαν πόλιν in Acts 16:11
πόλις πόλις, ιος, ἡ, gen. πόλεως dissyll. in attic Poets ionic and doric πόλιος dissyll. in Il. doric πολίεσι:—acc. πόλεις, πόλιας:— a city, Hom., Hes., etc.; πόλις ἄκρη and ἀκροτάτη, ῀ ἀκρόπολις, the citadel, Il.: this at Athens was often called simply πόλις, while the rest of the city was called ἄστυ, Thuc., etc.:—the name of the city was often added in gen., Ἰλίου π., Ἄργους π. the city of . . , Aesch., etc.; also in appos., ἡ Μένδη π. Thuc.
one's city or country, Od., etc.
when πόλις and ἄστυ are joined, the former is the body of citizens, the latter their dwellings, Il.; ὧν πόλις ἀνάριθμος ὄλλυται, where πόλις = a number of citizens, Soph.:—hence,
Read the full entry →Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · femininenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
sit'-i (`ir, qiryah; polis):
I. THE CANAANITE CITY
1. Origin
2. Extent
3. Villages
4. Sites
5. External Appearance
6. General
II. THE CITY OF THE JEWISH OCCUPATION
1. Tower or Stronghold
2. High Place
3. Broad Place
4. Streets
5. General Characteristics
III. STORE CITIES
IV. LEVITICAL CITIES
LITERATURE
I. The Canaanite City.
1. Origin:
The development of the Canaanite city has been traced by Macalister in his report on the excavation at Gezer (Palestine Exploration Fund Statement, 1904, 108 ff). It originated on the slopes of a bare rocky spur, in which the Neolithic Troglodytes quarried their habitations out of the solid rock, the stones therefrom being used to form a casing to the earthen ramparts, with which the site was afterwards surrounded and which served as a protection against the intrusion of enemies. Later Semitic intruders occupied the site, stone houses were built, and high stone defense…
City
The earliest mention of city-building is that of Enoch, which was built by Cain (Gen. 4:17). After the confusion of tongues, the descendants of Nimrod founded several cities (10:10-12). Next, we have a record of the cities of the Canaanites, Sidon, Gaza, Sodom, etc. (10:12, 19; 11:3, 9; 36:31-39). The earliest description of a city is that of Sodom (19:1-22). Damascus is said to be the oldest existing city in the world. Before the time of Abraham there were cities in Egypt (Num. 13:22). The Israelites in Egypt were employed in building the “treasure cities” of Pithom and Raamses (Ex. 1:11); but it does not seem that they had any cities of their own in Goshen (Gen.…
The towns and cities of Palestine were commonly built on heights, for better security against robbers or invaders. These heights, surrounded by walls, sometimes formed the entire city. In other cases, the citadel alone crowned the hill, around and at the base of which the town was built; and in time of danger the surrounding population all took refuge in the fortified place. Larger towns and cities were often not only defended by strong outer walls, with towers and gates, but by a citadel or castle within these limits-a last resort when the rest of the city was taken, Jud 9:46,51. The "fenced cities" of the Jews, De 3:5, were of various sizes and degrees of strength; some being surrounded by high and thick stone walls, and others by feebler ramparts, often of clay or sun-dried…
165 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 163 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 585 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.
ὅρους τε γῆς πρῶτος ἔθετο καὶ πόλιν ἐδείματο καὶ τείχεσιν ὠχύρωσεν εἰς ταὐτὸν συνελθεῖν τοὺς οἰκείους καταναγκάσας.
πάλιν ὡς ἔμελλεν ἡ πόλις καὶ ὁ ναὸς καὶ ὁ λαὸς Ἰσραὴλ παραδίδοσθαι, ἐφανερώθη.
ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ
Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις Πατοῦτος παστοφορίου ἐντὸς τοῦ
τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν τῶι πατρὶ τοῦ Ὥρου γῆν ἀρουρῶν … ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι Κροκοδίλων πόλεως ἀπὸ σφραγῖδος μιᾶς ἀναγραφομένης εἰς Ψενμ … τῶν πενταρούρων, νότου γῆ Πετεσούχου τοῦ Ἑρμίου
τετράγωνος is an adjective meaning 'square' or 'four-cornered,' derived from the roots for 'four' and 'angle.' It is used in various contexts, including geometry and military formations, and appears in Revelation 21:16. The term can also metaphorically imply perfection, as in something being 'square' in form.
τετράγωνος, -ον
(< τετρα-, v. supr., + γωνία),
[in LXX for רָבוּעַ and cogn. forms ;]
square: Re 21:16 (Hdt., Plat., al.).†
τετράγωνος, -ον; (fr. τέτρα, 4. V-, and γῶνος [i. 6. γωνία), quadrangular, square; [A. V. four-square] (Vulg. in quadro positus): Rey. xxi.16. (Sept.; Hdt., Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.)
τετράγωνος, “1 four corners,”’ τετράγωνος καὶ ἰσχυρός) occurs in Rey 2118: cf. PSI VI. 6771 (ili/B.C.) otpw?)patiov τετρά[γωνον a, BGU IV. 11672 (B.C. 12) ἐν TH τετραγώ(νῳ) στοᾷ, 23. I. 16212 “‘square’’ (Hesych. τετραντίας" τε]τράγωνον, P Lond 464% (hymn to Hermes—iv/a.D.) (=I. p. 78) στρονγύλε kal τετράγωνε λόγων ἀρχήγετα γλώσσης, and from the inscrr. OG/S go (Rosetta stone— B.C. 196) ἐπὶ τοῦ περὶ τὰς βασιλείας τετραγώνου. MGr τετράγωνο, ““54πάᾶγα." For τετραγωνίας in a personal description = ‘‘ squarebuilt,” ‘‘robust,’’ see P Petr III. 1274 (a Will—s.c. 234) λευκόχρως τετρα[γω]νίας τίετανός, and for τετραγωνισμός, “ἐᾷ squaring,’ see P Magd 205 (B.c. 218) αὐτὸς δὲ] ἐν τετραγωνισμῶι τὰ αὑτοῦ ἔχει, with reference to a partition of…
Read the full entry →τετράγωνος (tetragōnos) — square.
τετράγων-ος [ᾰ], ον,
with four angles, but usually square, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δοκοὶ τ. squared, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ξύλα τ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τ. ἐργασία, of the Hermes-statues, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κύκλος τετράγωνος ταῖς ἐπιφανείαις a ring with four surfaces, the breadth of the outer and inner equal to the depth of the two sides, [Refs 1st c.BC+]
2. τὸ τ. a square, [Refs 5th c.BC+], and frequently in Geometry texts, but sometimes of any quadrilateral, [Refs 4th c.BC+] “*Deff.” 100, [Refs 5th c.AD+]
2. b in Tactics, a body of men drawn up in square, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. τ. ἀριθμός a square number, i.e. a number made up of two equal factors, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
4. in quartile aspect, [Refs 1st c.BC+]
τετράγωνος
tetragonos
from 5064 and 1137; four-cornered, i.e. square:--foursquare.
see GREEK for 5064
see GREEK for 1137
τετράγωνος, ον
Adj
square
τετράγωνος tetragōnos 1x
four-angled, quadrangular, square, Rev. 21:16*
τετράγωνος τετρά-^γωνος, ον, γωνία with four equal angles, rectangular or square, Lat. quadratus, Hdt.; δοκοί τ. squared beams, Thuc.:— τετράγωνον, ου, a square, Plat.: a body of men drawn up in square, Lat. agmen quadratum, Xen.
τ. ἀριθμός a square number, i. e. a number multiplied into itself, Plat.
metaph. square, i. e. perfect, Simon. ap. Plat.
Adj-NSF — Adjective · nominative · singular · femininenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
A-NSF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
for'-skwar (rabha`; tetragonos):
"Foursquare," meaning equal in length and breadth, not round, is the translation of rabha` (from obsolete rebha`, "four"); it occurs in the description of the altar of burnt offering (Ex 27:1; 38:1); of the altar of incense (Ex 30:2; 37:25); of the breastplate of the high priest (Ex 28:16; 39:9); of the panels of the gravings upon the mouth of the brazen or molten sea in Solomon's temple (1Ki 7:31); of the inner court of Ezekiel's temple (Eze 40:47); of "the holy oblation" of the city of Ezekiel's vision (Eze 48:20, rebhi`i…
1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Counted over the 10 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
πρὸς δὲ τούτοις οὐδ’ ἐκεῖνο ἀγνοητέον, ὅτι πρῶτος ἀριθμῶν ὁ τέτταρα τετράγωνός ἐστιν ἰσάκις ἴσος, μέτρον δικαιοσύνης καὶ ἰσότητος, καὶ ὅτι μόνος ἐκ τῶν αὐτῶν καὶ συνθέσει καὶ δυνάμει πέφυκε γεννᾶσθαι, συνθέσει μὲν ἐκ δυοῖν καὶ δυοῖν, δυνάμει δὲ…
ἕτερος δὲ οἶκος ἦν ἐν μέσῳ κατὰ ὅλου τοῦ πλάτους τεταγμένος τετράγωνος εὖρος πηχῶν τριάκοντα, ἄντικρυς ἔχων ναὸν παχέσι στύλοις ἀνατεταμένον·
ὥσπερ γὰρ ὁ λίθος ὁ στρογγύλος, ἐὰν μὴ περικοπῇ καὶ ἀποβάλῃ ἐξ αὐτοῦ τι, οὐ δύναται τετράγωνος γενέσθαι, οὕτω καὶ οἱ πλουτοῦντες ἐν τούτῳ τῷ αἰῶνι, ἐὰν μὴ περικοπῇ αὐτῶν ὁ πλοῦτος, οὐ δύνανται τῷ κυρίῳ εὔχρηστοι γενέσθαι.
κεῖμαι, transliterated as keimai, is a verb meaning to lie or be laid down, often used in a passive sense. It encompasses various contexts, including lying down as a person or object, being situated, or being appointed for a purpose. In the New Testament, it appears in references to an infant (Lk 2:12), a dead body (Mt 28:6), and metaphorically to describe laws or states of being (1 Tim 1:9, 1 Jn 5:19).
κεῖμαι; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἔκειτο; fo lie; 1. prop.: of an infant, foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place, Lk. ii. 12 [Tdf. om. κείμ.], 16; of one buried: ὅπου or οὗ, Mt. xxviii. 6; Lk. xxiii. 53; Jn. xi. 41 Rec.; xx. 12; of things that quietly cover some spot, Lk. xxiv. 12 [RGLbr.]; Jn. xx. 5-7; xxi. 9; with ἐπί re added, 2 Co. iii. 15; ἐπάνω τινός (of a city situated on a hill), Mt. v. 14; also of things put or set in any place, in ref. to which we often use to stand: thus of vessels, Jn. ii. 6; xix. 29, (χύτρας κειμένας, Xen. oec. 8,19); of a throne, Rev. iv. 2 (Jer. xxiv. 1; Hom. Il. 2,777; Od. 17, 331); κεῖσθαι πρός τι, to be brought near to a thing [see πρός, I. 2 a.], Mt. iii. 10; Lk. iii. 9; absol., of the site of a city, τετράγωνος κεῖται, Rey. xxi. 16; of grain and other things laid up, gathered together, Lk. xii. 19; of a foundation, 1 Co. iii. 11. 2. metaph. a. to be (by God’s…
Read the full entry →κεῖμαι is used with reference to a dead body (as in Mt 285) in P Ryl II. 114%” (¢. A.D. 280), the petition of a woman against a certain Syrion who had endeavoured —aapratew τὰ τῶν [νηπίων μου τέκνων .. . παρὰ [αὐτῆς τῆς κοίτης τοῦ ἀνδρός μου καὶ τοῦ σώματος κειμένου, ‘to tear the property of my young children from the very bed of my husband where his body was lying” (Edd.). Cf. the i/a.p sepulchral inscr. from Alexandria, Pressigke 1397 Ἐξηνόφιλος κεῖμαι πατρὸς Finvodidov. Hence, more generally, of things “lying” or “‘set’’in a place (cf. 1 Cor 311), e.g. PSI IV. 365°° (B.C. 251-0) 6 γ]ὰρ σεῖτος ἐπὶ τῆς ἅλῳ κείμενος οὐθὲν ὠφελεῖ ἡμᾶς (cf. Lk 1215), P Oxy XII. 14794 (late 1{8.6.} διὸ τὰ βυβλία οὔπῳ εἴληφ(α), ἀλλὰ κεῖται ἀντιβεβλημένα, “T have not yet obtained the documents, but they are lying collated” (Edd.), 24. 148818 (ii/a.p.) ἡ ἐν τῷ αἰθρίῳ κειμένη μεγάλη θυΐα, ““1ῃ6 large mortar…
Read the full entry →κεῖμαι (keimai) — to lay/be appointed.
κεῖμαι, κεῖσαι
[Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect κέᾰται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; imperative κεῖσο, κείσθω, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; subjunctive 3rd.pers. singular κέηται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative 3rd.pers. singular κέοιτο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive κεῖσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; participle κεί μενος [Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect ἐκείμην [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect κείμην [Refs]; Epic dialect 3rd.pers. singular κέσκετο [Refs]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural ἐκέατο [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect κέατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future κείσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect κεισεῦμαι [Refs 3rd c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit śéte (={κεῖται}), also śáyate 'lie', Gr. κοίτη, κοιμάομαι, perhaps Latin cunae, etc.):—to be laid (used as passive to τίθημι): hence, lie, lie outstretched, used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] mostly with Preps., πυρὴν.. ᾗ ἔνι κεῖται Πάτροκλος [Refs 8th…
Read the full entry →κεῖμαι
keimai
middle voice of a primary verb; to lie outstretched (literally or
figuratively):--be (appointed, laid up, made, set), lay, lie. Compare
5087.
see GREEK for 5087
κεῖμαι
v.
I lie, recline, am laid
κεῖμαι keimai 24x
to lie, to be laid; to recline, to be lying, to have been laid down, Mt. 28:6; Lk. 2:12; to have been laid, placed, set, Mt. 3:10; Lk. 3:9; Jn. 2:6; to be situated, as a city, Mt. 5:14; Rev. 21:16; to be in store, Lk. 12:19; met. to be constituted, established as a law, 1 Tim. 1:9; in NT of persons, to be specially set, solemnly appointed, destined, Read the full entry →
κεῖμαι to be laid (used as a Pass. to τίθημι), and so to lie, lie outstretched, Hom., etc.; ὁ δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἐννέα κεῖτο πέλεθρα lay stretched over nine plethra, Od.; κειμένωι ἐπεμπηδᾶν to kick him when he's down, Ar.
to lie asleep, repose, Hom., etc.:—also, to lie idle, lie still, id. Hom.; ὑπὸ γαστέρ᾽ ἐλυσθεὶς κείμην of Ulysses under the ram's belly, Od.; κακὸν κείμενον a sleeping evil, Soph.
to lie sick or wounded, lie in misery, Hom., Soph., etc.; to lie at the mercy of the conqueror, Aesch.
to lie dead, like Lat. jacere, Hom., Hdt., Trag.
to lie neglected or uncared for, of an unburied corpse, Il.;—so also of places, to lie in ruins, Aesch.
of wrestlers, to have a fall, id. Aesch., Ar.
of places, to lie, be situated, Od., Hdt., attic
Verb-PNI-3S — Verb · present · no voice stated · indicative · third person · singularpresent no voice stated indicative — an action in progress.
V-PNI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
25 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 24 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
ὅτι περὶ τὸ μέσον καὶ ὡς ἂν ἐν μεθορίῳ κείμενον ἡδονῆς καὶ αἰσθήσεως γίνεται τούτων ὁ πόλεμος.
μεθυσθεὶς δὲ εἰς ὕπνον καταφέρεται καὶ γεγυμνωμένος παρακόσμως ἔκειτο.
ἐγενόμην οὖν, ἀδελφοί, εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν καὶ συνεψήφισα τὰς ὥρας καὶ ἦλθον εἰς τὸν τόπον, ὅπου διεταξάμην αὐτῇ ἐλθεῖν, καὶ βλέπω συμψέλιον κείμενον ἐλεφάντινον, καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ συμψελίου ἔκειτο κερβικάριον λινοῦν καὶ ἐπάνω λέντιον ἐξηπλωμένον λινοῦν…
ξύστρα, ἄλλοι σάκκοι κενοὶ β, πόδες κλίνης δ, ἀγωγεῖς β, ἀλαβαστροθήκη ἄβαξ παρʼ Ἰναρῶτι κείμενος, κελλίβας, ἄλλοι πόδες κλίνης τορνευτοὶ Α ἄλλος λεκάνη Γσ, ἄλλος μελίεφθα φ, ἄλλος μικρὸς
δάνειον αὐτοῦ τῆς μνᾶς ἥ ἐστι γραφή; πέμψεις τὸ κλειδίον καὶ σήμαινόν μοι ποῦ κεῖται ἵνα αὐτὰ προέλω ἵνα ἐὰν μέλλω πρὸς αὐτὸν λογιεῖν ἔχω αὐτά. μὴ οὖν ἄλλως
σφραγῖδος ἰδιωτικῆς σπορίμης ἀρούρας ἐννέα ἥμισυ ἐν τόπῳ λεγομένῳ Τμειτειας ἐπʼ ὀνόματι Ἀλοῦτος καθὼς κεῖται ἐν τῇ ἀπογραφῇ τῶν γειτνιῶν παρὰ Σαβίνου κηνσιτορεύσαντι ἐπὶ τοῖς οὖσι αὐτῶν ὁρίοις πᾶσι
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word μῆκος (i.mēkos) means 'length' and can refer to physical dimensions, height, or even the length of time or speech. It appears in the New Testament in Ephesians 3:18 and Revelation 21:16, emphasizing the vastness of God's blessings. The lexicons indicate that it can also imply magnitude or greatness in various contexts.
μῆκος, -eos (-ous), τό, fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often for JIS; /ength: Rev. xxi. 16; τὸ πλάτος καὶ μῆκος καὶ βάθος καὶ ὕψος, language used in shadowing forth the greatness, extent, and number of the blessings received from Christ, Eph. iii. 18.
μῆκος, “length,” of space, size, is seen in P Ryl II. 224 (a)® (ii/A.D.) μήκο(υς) πηχῶν [.]: cf. P Lond 755 verso4'(iv/aA.D.) (= III. p. The reference is to time in P Leid W- 8 (ii/iii A.D.) (=II. p. 89) σύρισον ἐπὶ μῆκος, and OG/S 66677 (A.p. 54-68) διὰ τὸ μῆκος τοῦ [xpd ]vo[v. 222f.).
μῆκος (mēkos) — length.
μῆκος,
Doric dialect μᾶκος [Refs 4th c.BC+]: εος, τό:— length, of a club, τόσσον ἔην μῆκος, τόσσον πάχος so large was it in length, so large in thickness, [LXX+8th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ μῆκος lengthwise, ἐπὶ μ. ἔκτασις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μᾶκος ἔδικε threw a long distance, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ μεγάλα μ. great lengths, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__b height, of a wall, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of persons, stature, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μῆκος in height,[Refs 5th c.BC+]
__c generally, μήκει in linear measurement, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; linearity, one-dimensional magnitude, opposed to ἐπίπεδον, βάθος, [Refs]: in Arith., in the first power, [Refs]
μῆκος
mekos
probably akin to 3173; length (literally or figuratively) length.
see GREEK for 3173
μῆκος, ους, τό
n.n.
length
μῆκος mēkos 2x
length, Eph. 3:18; Rev. 21:16*
μῆκος μακρός length, Od.; ἐν μήκει καὶ πλάτει καὶ βάθει Plat.; μ. ὁδοῦ Hdt.; πλοῦ Thuc.: —in pl., τὰ μέγαλα μ. great distances, Plat.
of persons, height, tallness, stature, Od.
of Time, Aesch., etc.:—also μ. λόγου, μ. τῶν λόγων a long speech, id. Aesch.; ἐν μήκει λόγων Thuc.
τὸ μῆκος or μῆκος absol. as adv. in length, Hdt., etc.:— at length, in full, οὐ μῆκος ἀλλὰ σύντομα Soph.
μῆκος in height, Od.
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 70 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
22, 3) διαδέξασθαι τὸν ἀρετῆς κλῆρον φωτὶ τρισσῷ, μνήμῃ τῶν παρεληλυθότων καὶ ἐναργείᾳ τῶν παρόντων καὶ τῇ τῶν μελλόντων ἐλπίδι, τεσσαράκοντα ἐτῶν ἀριθμόν, μῆκος τοσούτου χρόνου, τρίβεται τὴν ἐν κύκλῳ περιάγων καὶ ἀλώμενος ἕνεκα τοῦ πολυτρόπου, τὴν…
λάρνακα τετράστεγον κατασκευάσας πηχῶν τὸ μῆκος τριακοσίων πεντήκοντα δὲ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τριάκοντα τὸ βάθος, εἰς ταύτην σὺν τῇ μητρὶ τῶν παίδων καὶ ταῖς τούτων γυναιξὶν ἀνέβη, τά τε ἄλλα ὅσα πρὸς τὰς χρείας ἐπικουρήσειν αὐτοῖς ἔμελλεν ἐνθέμενος, ζῷά…
δύο σφραγίδων τῶν τόπων νότου εἴσοδος Ὥρου καὶ Πολέμωνος ἥ ἐστιν πήχεις β ἐπὶ μῆκος τῆς εἰσόδου καὶ ἐξόδου Τοθίους Σενθέως καὶ Πόρτιος τοῦ Πόρτου βορρᾶ τῶν β σφραγίδων
τὴν ἐν Φνέβι περσέαν τὴν μεγάλην κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ πλατύμματος· ἔταξα πλάτος πηχῶν ζ, καὶ μῆκος πηχῶν ιδ· καὶ τὰ ἐν τῇ καμάρᾳ ἐν αιρῳ κεῖται· οὐδεὶς ᾕρην· οὐ γὰρ
Ὀξυρύγχων πόλεως Αὐρηλίῳ Δημητρίῳ Θέωνος τοῦ Ἡλιοδώρου ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως ὃν ἔχουσι σκαφοπάκτωνα μῆκος πηχῶν δεκαπέντε αὐτόστολον ἐξηρτισμένον πᾶσι καὶ ναύταις ἱκανοῖς πρὸς ἀνάπλουν εἰς Τεβενοῦτιν ἀπὸ ὅρμου
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-GSF — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
P-GSF Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
τοσοῦτος is a demonstrative adjective meaning 'so great' or 'so much,' derived from the roots for 'so' and 'this.' It describes quantity, size, or number, and can refer to time as well. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Matthew 8:10 and John 14:9. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement regarding its meanings.
τοσοῦτος, -αύτη, -οῦτο
(He 7:22) and (elsewhere, as usually in Attic) -οῦτον, correlat. of ὅσος, of quantity, size, number, so great, so much, pl., so many: Mt 8:10, Lk 7:9, He 12:1, Re 18:7, 16; of time, so long, χρόνος, Jo 14:9, He 4:7; pl., Lk 15:29 (ἔτη), Jo 12:37 21:11, I Co 14:10; seq. ὥστε, Mt 15:33; absol.: pl., Jo 6:9, Ga 3:4; of…
Read the full entry →τοσοῦτος, -αὐτη. -ovTo (Heb. vii. 22 LT Tr WH) and -obrov, (ἴτ. τόσος and οὗτος; [4]. say lengthened fr. τόσος; cf. τηλικοῦτος, init.]), so great; with nouns: of quantity, roo. πλοῦτος. Rev. xviii. 17 (16); of internal amount, 88, 2); τόπον ἔχειν sc. τοῦ εὐαγ| πίστις, Mt. viii. 10; Lk. vii. 9; [ὅσα ἐδόξασεν ἑαυτήν, τοxx. 7. the particular place referred to is defined by | the words appended: — by a genitive, τόπ. τῆς βασάνου, σοῦτον δότε βασανισμόν. Rev. xviii. 7]; of size, νέφος, Heb. xii. 1; plur. so many: ἰχθύες, Jn. xxi. 113 σημεῖα, Jn. xii. 37; γένη φωνῶν, 1 Co. xiv. 10; ἔτη, Lk. xv. 29 [(here | A.V. these many)], (in prof. writ., esp. the Attic, we | often find τοσοῦτος καὶ τοιοῦτος and the reverse; see HeinTOTE dorf on Plat. Gorg. p. 34; Passow p. 1923"; [L. and 5. s.vv.]); foll. by ὥστε, so many as to be able, ete. [B. 244 (210)], Mt. xv. 33; of time: so long, χρόνος, [ Jn. xiv.…
Read the full entry →τοσοῦτος (1) of size, quantity, ‘‘so great,’’ ‘‘so large”: P Hib I. 51° (B.C. 245) τοσοῦτο yap ἔκκειται ἐγ βασιλικοῦ, “ for that is the rate published by the government ” (Edd.), P Ry] II. 967 (A.D. 117-8) τοσοῦτο τέλεσμα οὐ βαστάζει, ‘it (sc. crown-land) does not bear so great a charge” (Edd.), and in a more general sense P Amh II. 14117 (a.D. 350) ἐπιδίSwope. . . τάδε τὰ βιβλία [μο]υ τοσοῦτο μαρτυραμένη, “1 present this my petition bearing witness to the facts’ (Edd.). (2) of time, ‘‘so long”: P Lond 4255 (B.c. 168) (= I. p- 30, Selections p. 10) τοσούτου χρόνου ἐπιγεγονότος, ‘‘so long a time having elapsed,” P Tebt II. 30218 (a.p. 71-2) τ]οσούτων ἐτῶν, ‘‘for so many years,” P Oxy III. 5309 (ii/A.p.) ἐπὶ μάτην] δὲ τῶι τοῦ Ilavoiplwvos τοσοῦτον χρόνον προσκαρτερ[ῶ, ““«πὰ that I have so long been engaged with Pausirion’s business to no purpose ” (Edd.). (3) The following prepositional…
Read the full entry →τοσοῦτος (tosoutos) — so great.
τοσοῦτος, αύτη, οῦτο
(or τοσοῦτον, see entry near the end); Epic dialect τοσσοῦτος; Aeolic dialect τεσσοῦτος (which see); ={τόσος} in all senses, but like{τοσόσδε} with stronger demonstrative sense: [Refs 8th c.BC+] while in Trag. (not in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; by ὁπόσος, [Refs]; by ὅστις, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also by adverb ὡς, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τ. ἐγένετο ὥστε.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently also, like{τοσόσδε}, absolutely, ἄφενος τ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of persons, so large, so tall, etc., καί σε τ. ἔθηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also, so great (in rank, skill, or character), [Refs 5th c.BC+]: plural, so many, τ. ἔτεα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [χρήματα] [Refs 8th c.BC+] so big, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοσοῦτος τὸ βάθος so deep, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τοσοῦτος ἐν κακίᾳ (variant{εἰς κακίαν}) [Refs 5th c.BC+]of the same height, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἕτεροι or…
Read the full entry →τοσοῦτος
tosoutos
from tosos (so much; apparently from 3588 and 3739) and 3778
(including its variations); so vast as this, i.e. such (in quantity,
amount, number of space):--as large, so great (long, many, much),
these many.
see GREEK for 3588
see GREEK for 3739
see GREEK for 3778
τοσοῦτος, τοσαύτη, τοσοῦτο
Dem.pr.
so great
τοσοῦτος = τόσος in all senses, but with a stronger demonstr. force, Hom., etc.; of persons, so large, so tall, καί σε τοσοῦτον ἔθηκα Il.; so great in rank, skill,or character, Soph., etc.:—in pl. so many, Hom.,etc.:—also τοσοῦτος μέγαθος so large, Hdt.; τοσοῦτος τὸ βάθος so deep, Xen.:—with numeral Advs., δὶς τ.,πολλάκις τ., etc., Thuc., etc.; ἕτερον τοσοῦτο as large again, Hdt.
neut. as Subst., so much, thus much, τοσσοῦτον ὀνήσιος Od.; τοσαῦτ᾽ ἔλεξε Aesch.; —with Preps., διὰ τοσούτου at so small a distance, Thuc.;— ἐς τοσοῦτο so far, Lat. hactenus, eatenus, Hdt., etc.;— ἐκ τ. from so far, so far off, Xen.;— ἐν τοσούτῳ in the meantime, Ar.;— ἐπὶ τοσοῦτο so far, Hdt.;— κατὰ τοσοῦτον so far, Plat.;— μέχρι τοσούτου so far, so long, Thuc.;— παρὰ τοσοῦτον κινδύνου into such imminent danger…
Read the full entry →21 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 20 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
προλαβὼν γὰρ ὁ θεὸς ἅτε θεὸς ὅτι μίμημα καλὸν οὐκ ἄν ποτε γένοιτο δίχα καλοῦ παραδείγματος οὐδέ τι τῶν αἰσθητῶν ἀνυπαίτιον, ὃ μὴ πρὸς ἀρχέτυπον καὶ νοητὴν ἰδέαν ἀπεικονίσθη, βουληθεὶς τὸν ὁρατὸν κόσμον τουτονὶ δημιουργῆσαι προεξετύπου τὸν νοητόν,…
Ἐπειδὴ δὲ πάντα σχεδὸν ἐκ τῆς τοῦ νομοθέτου σοφίας ἡμῖν ἀνήρτηται Μωυσέος, ἀνάγκη μοι βραχέα περὶ ἐκείνου προειπεῖν, ὅπως μή τινες τῶν ἀναγνωσομένων διαπορῶσι, πόθεν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος περὶ νόμων καὶ πράξεων ἔχων τὴν ἀναγραφὴν ἐπὶ τοσοῦτον φυσιολογίας…
Τῶν τοσούτων οὖν καὶ τοιούτων οὕτως μεμαρτυρημένων τὸ ταπεινόφρον καὶ τὸ ὑποδεὲς διὰ τῆς ὑπακοῆς οὐ μόνον ἡμᾶς, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰς πρὸ ἡμῶν γενεὰς βελτίους ἐποίησεν, τούς τε καταδεξαμένους τὰ λόγια αὐτοῦ ἐν φόβῳ καὶ ἀληθείᾳ.
μετὰ γραμμάτων ἀναπέμπειν καὶ δηλοῦν τί ἀνεπέμφθη διὰ τίνος. ἃ δὲ ἀνεπέμψας οὐκ ἦν τοσαῦτα ὥστε καὶ ἄνθρωπον καὶ ὄνον καταργηθῆναι διὰ τέσσαρα κερτύλλια συκαρίων σαπρῶν. ἐνεφαίνετο δὲ ἐκ
Νίννος Ἡρωνίνῳ τῷ φιλτάτῳ χαίρειν. εἰς τοσαύτην ἀτυχίαν ἦλθες τοσαῦτα λήμματα ἀναλίσκων ὡς μὴ ἔχειν σε ἀρτάβην μίαν λωτινοῦ. τὴν μὲν
τῶν ἄλλων ἐγκρατεῖς ἐγένοντο ἐμοὶ μηδὲν παρασχόμενοι μήτε τὰ ὄσπρεα μήτε τὰ βοικὰ τετράποδα τοσούτου χρόνου διαγενομένου καταφρονοῦντές μου. τούτου ἕνεκεν καταλαμβάνω τὴν σὴν ἀνδρείαν δεόμενος καὶ παρακαλῶν ὅπως
εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.
εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…
Read the full entry →εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…
Read the full entry →εἰμί (eimi) — to be.
εἰμί
(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…
Read the full entry →εἰμί
eimi
the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a
primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,
have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,
2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.
see GREEK for 1488
see GREEK for 1498
see GREEK for 1511
see GREEK for 1527
see GREEK for 2258
see GREEK for 2071
see GREEK for 2070
see GREEK for 2075
see GREEK for 2076
see GREEK for 2771
see GREEK for 2468
see GREEK for 5600
εἰμί
v.
I am, exist
εἰμί eimi 2x
to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6
εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.
of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.
Read the full entry →2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
The Greek word ὅσος (i.e., *hosos*) is a relative adjective meaning 'how much,' 'how many,' or 'how great.' It is used to express quantity, size, distance, and time, often in comparison with another quantity. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Mark 7:36 and Romans 7:1. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement regarding its meanings or uses.
ὅσος, -η, -ον,
correlat. of τοσοῦτος,
how much, how many, how great, how far, how long, as much as, etc. (= Lat. quantus);
ὅσος, -η, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], a relative adj. corresponding to the demon. τοσοῦτος either expressed or understood, Lat. quantus, -a,-um; used a. of space [as great as]: τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς (Rec. adds τοσοῦτόν ἐστιν) ὅσον καὶ [ἃ Τ' Tr WH om. καί] τὸ πλάτος, Rev. xxi. 16; of time [as long as]: ἐφ᾽ ὅσον χρόνον, for so long time as, so long as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 39; Gal. iv. 1; also without a prep., ὅσον χρόνον, Mk. ii. 19; neut. ἐφ᾽ ὅσον, as long as, Mt. ix. 15; 2 Pet. i. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 8, 25); ἔτι μικρὸν ὅσον ὅσον, yet a Little how very, how very, (Vulg. modicum [ali |quantulum), i. e. yet a very little while, Heb. x. 37 (Is. xxvi. 20; of a very little thing, Arstph. vesp. 213; οἵ. Herm. ad Vig. p. 726 no. 93; W. 247 (231) note; B. § 150, 2). b. of abundance and multitude; how many, as many as; how much, as much as: neut. ὅσον, Jn. vi. 11; plur. ὅσοι, as many (men) as, all who, Mt.…
Read the full entry →ὅσος. The varied uses of ὅσος ἴῃ the NT can be readily illustrated from our sources. Thus for the meaning ‘‘as great as,” “‘how great,” ‘“how much,” as in Mk 519, cf. P Tebt II. 310" (Α.}. 186) doa (/. ὅσα) ἔχω ἔτη, “for my term of years’ (Edd.), 23. 3144 (ii/A.D.) ὅσον κάμ[α]τον ἤνεγκα, “ον much trouble I had,” 7. 3787" (A.D. 265) τὰ ἄλλα ὅσα καθήκει, ‘all else that is fitting,” and P Oxy VI. 903% (iv/A.D.) αὐτὴ οἷδεν ὅσα κέκτηται, ‘she knows how much she has possessed herself of” (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to practically the meaning ‘‘all,’’ as in 24. 89815 (A.D. 123) ὑποθέσθαι ὅσα ἔχω ἐν τῇ ᾿Οάσε[ι] κτήματα, “εἴο mortgage all my property in the Oasis” (Edd.). The combination πάντα ὅσα, as in Mt 712 a/., is very common, e.g. BGU IV, 1113! (B.c. 14) πάϊντα ὅσα ποτ᾽ ἔσχεν [ὃ πατή]ρ, P Oxy I. 115° (ii/A.p.) (= Selections, p. 96) πάντα ὅσα ἣν καθήκοντα ἐποίησα, ‘everything…
Read the full entry →ὅσος (hosos) — just as/how much.
ὅσος,
Epic dialect ὅσσος, η, ον, both forms in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὅσσος also in [Refs 4th c.BC+]; and in many dialects, e. g. Lesb., [Refs 7th c.BC+] ii 18 (ὄσσος), argument, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Central Cretan dialect ὄζος [Refs], and ὄττος [Refs] adjective:—of Size, as great as, how great; of Quantity, as much as, how much; of Space, as far as, how far; of Time, as long as, how long; of Number, as many as, how many; of Sound, as loud as, how loud: correlative with τόσος (τόσσος), τοσόσδε, τοσοῦτος, in sense as, τόσσον χρόνον ὅσσον ἄνωγας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τοσοῦτον ὄχλον καὶ παρασκευήν, ὅσην.. [Refs 4th c.BC+] as antecedent, χῶρον ἅπαντα ὅσσον.. [Refs 8th c.BC+] just so much as, ἐμοὶ δ᾽ ἴσον τῇς χώρας μέτα, ὅσονπερ ὑμῖν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀσπίδες ὅσσαι ἄρισται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; agreeing with an antecedent implied in an adjective, γυναικείας ἀρετῆς…
Read the full entry →ὅσος
hosos
by reduplication from 3739; as (much, great, long, etc.) as:--all
(that), as (long, many, much) (as), how great (many, much),
(in-)asmuch as, so many as, that (ever), the more, those things, what
(great, -soever), wheresoever, wherewithsoever, which, X while,
who(-soever).
see GREEK for 3739
ὅσος, η, ον
Corr.pr.
how much, how great, how many
ὅσος hosos 110x
as great, as much, Mk. 7:36; Jn. 6:11; Heb. 1:4; 8:6; 10:25; ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον, for how long a time, while, as long as, Rom. 7:1; so, ἐφ’ ὅσον, i.e. χρόνον, Mt. 9:15; ὅσον χρόνον, how long, Mk. 2:19; neut. ὅσον repeated, ὅσον ὅσον, used to give intensity to other qualifying words, e.g., μικρόν, the very least, a very little while, Heb. 10:37; ἐφ’ ὅσον, in as much as, Mt. 25:40, 45; καθ’ ὅσον, by how much, so far as, Read the full entry →
ὅσος like Lat. quantus, of Size, as great as, how great; of Quantity, as much as, how much; of Space, as far as, how far; of Time, as long as, how long; of Number, as many as, how many; of Sound, as loud as, how loud; in pl. as many as, Lat. quot:—its antecedent is τόσος, after which ὅσος is simply as; τόσσον χρόνον, ὅσσον ἄνωγας so long time as thou dost order, Il.:—often the antec. is omitted, φωνὴ ὅση σκύλακος Od.
with τις, to denote indefinite size or number, ὅσον τι δένδρον Hdt., etc.
with Adjs. expressing Quantity, ὄχλος ὑπερφυὴς ὅσος prodigiously large, Ar.; θαυμαστὸν ὅσον διαφέρει differs amazingly, Plat.;—so in Lat. mirum quantum, immane quantum.
with Sup., ὅσα πλεῖστα the most possible, Hdt., etc.; v. infr. III. 4.
K-NSN — Correlative pronoun · nominative · singular · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
K-NSN Part of Speech: correlative pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
az: Conj. and adverb (usually Greek hos hosper, kathos), designating:
(1) Likeness: (a) between nouns (Ge 3:5; Jud 6:5; Php 2:8; Heb 11:27,29); (b) between verbs (Lu 6:36; Joh 5:30; 1Co 10:7); (c) between adjectives (1Co 15:48).
(2) Limitation (with respect to a particular aspect or relation) (1Pe 4:15,16).
111 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 110 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 305 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
καὶ γὰρ πατὴρ ἐκγόνων καὶ δημιουργὸς τῶν δημιουργηθέντων στοχάζεται τῆς διαμονῆς καὶ ὅσα μὲν ἐπιζήμια καὶ βλαβερὰ μηχανῇ πάσῃ διωθεῖται, τὰ δὲ ὅσα ὠφέλιμα καὶ λυσιτελῆ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον ἐκπορίζειν ἐπιποθεῖ·
καθʼ ὅσον δʼ ἂν ἀποστῶσι τῆς τούτων ἀκριβοῦς ἐπιμελείας, ἄπορα μὲν γίνεται τὰ πόριμα, τρέπεται δὲ εἰς συμφορὰς ἀνηκέστους ὅ τι ποτʼ ἂν ὡς ἀγαθὸν δρᾶν σπουδάσωσιν,
ἐφ̓ ὅσον ἐστὶν ἐν ἡμῖν, μελετῶμεν τὸν φόβον τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ φυλάσσειν ἀγωνιζώμεθα τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα ἐν τοῖς δικαιώμασιν αὐτοῦ εὐφρανθῶμεν.
πάθω, καταλείπω καὶ δίδωμι τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μοι ἔγγαιά τε καὶ ἔπιπλα καὶ κτήνη καὶ ὅσα ἂν προσεπικτήσωμαι Ταθώτηι Ἁρυώτου Περσίνῃ ᾗ σύνειμι γυναικὶ κατὰ νόμους, πλὴν στρώματος ἑνὸς καὶ
ἄλλης γῆς ἐκτὸς φορολογίας καὶ τῶν συνκυρόντων πάντων ὧν κεκράτηκεν ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν ἐφʼ ὅσον περιῆι χρόνον, ἡμῶν δὲ μετὰ τὴν ἐκείνου τελευτὴν τῶν λοιπῶν κρατουσῶν, Ἀρίστων Ἀθηνοδότου τῶν
παρʼ ἡμῶν προκεχειρισμένωι ἐπὶ τὸν ἐπισπουδασμὸν τοῦ πυροῦ πλοίων δύο χρημάτιζε κατὰ μῆνα, ἐφʼ ὅσον ἂν χρόνον περὶ τὸ προκείμενον ἦι, ἑκάστωι τοῦ μηνὸς τάλαντα η Γ, πυροῦ ἀρτάβας
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
ol'-so: In the Greek kai, when it is equivalent to "also" or "even," is always placed before the word or phrase which it is intended to emphasize (e.g. Ac 12:3; 1 Joh 4:21). Mt 6:14 should therefore read, "Your heavenly Father will forgive you also"; Lu 6:13, "Whom also he named apostles"; Heb 8:6, "The mediator of a better covenant also"; and 1Th 4:14, `If we believe that Jesus died and rose again, so also (we believe that) those who are fallen asleep in Jesus, God will bring with Him.'
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
πλάτος is a neuter noun meaning 'breadth' or 'width.' It appears in the New Testament in Ephesians 3:18 and Revelation 21:16, suggesting a sense of great extent. The word is derived from a root meaning 'broad' and can also refer to dimensions in mathematics or metaphorically to a range of variation.
πλάτος, -ous, τό, [ (cf. πλάξ), fr. Hdt. down], breadth : Eph. iii. 18 (on which see μῆκος) ; Rev. xxi. 16; carrying with it the suggestion of great extent, τῆς γῆς, Opp. to the ends or corners of the earth, Rev. xx. 9; (for any, Hab. i. 6).
πλάτος, breadth”: BGU IV. 1157® (B.c. 10) πλάτους πηχῶν ἕνδεκα, and similarly P Oxy II. 24215 (a.p. 77), P Giss I. 42%. (A.D. 117). Cf. πλάτυμμα in BGU I. 1623 (ii/iii ἄλλο πλάτυμμα ἕν χρυσοῦν, and πλάτυσμα, Herodas III. 46. “tile,” in
πλάτος (platos) — width.
πλάτος [ᾰ], εος, τό,
(πλατύς)
__A breadth, width, σώματος [Refs 4th c.BC+] in breadth. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.b in Mathematics texts, breadth, i.e. the second dimension, ἐν μήκει καὶ π. καὶ βάθει [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ π., opposed to κατὰ μῆκος, κατὰ βάθος, [Refs]
__A.2 plane surface, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.3 latitude, whether terrestrial or celestial, [Refs 1st c.BC+]
__A.4 metaphorically, plane, ἐν τῷ ψυχικῷ π. [Refs 5th c.AD+]
__A.5 plane of flat fish, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; flat of the tail, [Refs]; flat part of the body of the fishing-frog, [Refs]
__A.6 extension, breadth of a subject, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
__A.7 ={πλάτας}, Judeich [Refs]
__A.II metaphorically, range of variation, latitude, π. ἔχειν [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
πλάτος
platos
from 4116; width:--breadth.
see GREEK for 4116
πλάτος, ους, τό
n.n.
breadth
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 31 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
διόπερ οἰκείως εὔχεται τούτῳ προσγενέσθαι πλάτος, ὅπως καὶ ταῖς περὶ ψυχὴν ἀρεταῖς, φρονήσει καὶ σωφροσύνῃ καὶ ἑκάστῃ τῶν ἄλλων, χρῆσθαι δύναιτο καὶ ταῖς σώματος, ὑγείᾳ κὶ εὐαισθησίᾳ δυνάμει τε καὶ ῥώμῃ καὶ ταῖς τούτων συrίενέσιν, ἔτι μέντοι καὶ…
λάρνακα τετράστεγον κατασκευάσας πηχῶν τὸ μῆκος τριακοσίων πεντήκοντα δὲ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τριάκοντα τὸ βάθος, εἰς ταύτην σὺν τῇ μητρὶ τῶν παίδων καὶ ταῖς τούτων γυναιξὶν ἀνέβη, τά τε ἄλλα ὅσα πρὸς τὰς χρείας ἐπικουρήσειν αὐτοῖς ἔμελλεν ἐνθέμενος, ζῷά…
τὴν ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου διώρυγα, τῆς δὲ προωνομασμένης κρεμαστῆς ποτιστρέας οὔσης … … … ρεως πλάτος ἐντὸς περιχώματος τεσσάρων ἐπὶ τὸ θ … … … κος· τὰς δὲ εἰσόδους καὶ
Διονύσου πλάκες … πλάτος ποδῶν τούτων ι … πλάτος ποδῶν … λοι ποδῶν τκϛ ποδῶν η πάχος ποδῶν
ἐκ τοῦ πρὸς ἀπηλιώτην μέρους διʼ ὅλης τῆς αὐλῆς κοινὴν εἴσοδον καὶ ἔξοδον, ἧς πλάτος λιβὸς ἐπʼ ἀπηλιώτην πηχῶν δύο ἡμίσους ἀρχομένης ἀπὸ τῆς ἀπὸ βορρᾶ δημοσίας ὁδοῦ μέχρι
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
μετρέω (metreō) means to measure in various contexts, including space, number, and value. It can refer to physically measuring distances or metaphorically assessing worth or standards, as seen in verses like Matthew 7:2 and 2 Corinthians 10:12. The word is derived from μέτρον (metron), meaning 'measure.' The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.
μετρέω, -ῶ
(< μέτρον),
[in LXX: Ex 16:18, Nu 35:5, Ru 3:15, Is 40:12, (מדד), Da TH 5:26 (מְנָה), Wi 4:8*;]
to measure, of space, number, value, etc.: c. acc. rei, Re 11:2 21:15, 17; c. dat. instr., Re 11:1 21:16. Metaph., ἑαυτὸν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, II Co 10:12.
μετρέω, -@; 1 ΔοΥ. ἐμέτρησα; 1 fut. pass. μετρηθήσομαι; (μέτρον) ; fr. Hom. Od. 3,179 down; Sept. several times for 1319; to measure; i. e. 1. to measure out or otf; a. prop. any space or distance with a measurer’s reed orrule: τὸν ναόν, τὴν αὐλήν, ete., Rev. xi. 2; xxi. 15, 17; with τῷ καλάμῳ added, Rey. xxi. 16; ἐν αὐτῷ, i. 6. τῷ καλάμῳ, Rev. xi. 1. b. metaph. to judge according to any rule or standard, to estimate: ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, by what standard ye measure (others) [but the instrumental ἐν seems to point to a measure of capacity; cf. W. 388 (363); B. § 133, 19. On the proverb see further below], Mt. vii. 2; Mk. iv. 24; pass. to be judged, estimated, ibid.; μετρεῖν ἑαυτὸν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, to measure one’s self by one’s self, to derive from one’s self the standard by which one estimates one’s self, 2 Co. x. 12 [cf. W. § 31, 8 fin.]. 2. to measure to, mete out to, i. 6. to give by…
Read the full entry →μετρέω. “*measure,” is naturally common, e.g. P Petr III. 89? (Ptol.) μετρῆσαι τοῖς ὑπογεγραμμένοις γεωργοῖς δανεῖον εἰς τὸν σπόρον τοῦ κροτῶνος, P Tebt I. τοῦ (B.C. 119) τὰ ἀπολείψοντα ἐκ τοῦ ἰδίου μετρήσει, ‘he shall measure out the deficiency from his private means ” (Edd.), Chrest. 1. 168% (B.C. 95) of δὲ μεταληψόμενοι τὴν χρείαν μετρήσουσι κατ᾽ ἔτος els τὸ ἱερόν, P Tebt IT. 4594 (Β.Ο. 5) ὃ ἐὰν περισσὸν γένηται μέτρηϊσ]ον avrois, P Ryl II. 16S (A.D. 120) τὰ δὲ ἐκφόρια μετρήσωι ἐν τῶι “Edelr μηνί, “ΕἸ will measure the rent in the month Epeiph,” P Flor II. | 154* (A.p. 268) mé[oas] ἀρτάβας ἐμέτρησας τοῖς] δεκαπρώτοις ; cf. the compound katapetpéw (LXX Numb 347 αἰ} in connexion with ‘‘ horsemen,” “cavalry,”…
Read the full entry →μετρέω (metreō) — to measure.
μετρ-έω,
Heraclean I plural imperfect ἐμετρίωμες [Refs]present participle passive μετριώμεναι[Refs 4th c.BC+]: (μέτρον):—measure:
I. of Space, measure, i. e. pass over, traverse, πέλαγος μέγα μετρήσαντες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; προτέρω μετρεῖν (i.e. θάλασσαν) to sail farther, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—in middle, ἅλα μετρήσασθαι [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; μετρούμενον ἴχνη τὰ κείνου measuring them with the eyes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, to be measured, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; to be measured round, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
II. of Time, μακροὶ.. ἂν μετρηθεῖεν χρόνοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]
III. of Number, Size, Worth, etc.,
III.1. count, [Refs 7th c.BC+]
μετρέω
metreo
from 3358; to measure (i.e. ascertain in size by a fixed standard); by
implication, to admeasure (i.e. allot by rule):--figuratively, to
estimate:--measure, mete.
see GREEK for 3358
μετρέω
v.
I measure, estimate
μετρέω metreō 11x
to allot, measure, Mt. 7:2; Mk. 4:24; Lk. 6:38; Rev. 11:1, 2; 21:15-17; met. to estimate, 2 Cor. 10:12*
μετρέω μέτρον to measure in any way:
of Space, to measure, i. e. pass over, traverse, πέλαγος μέγα μετρήσασαν Od.:—Mid., ἅλα μετρήσασθαι Mosch.
in the common sense, to measure, Lat. metiri, τὴν γῆν σταδίοισι Hdt.; τῆι γαστρὶ μ. τὴν εὐδαιμονίαν to measure happiness by sensual enjoyments, Dem.:—Mid., μετρεῖσθαι ἴχνη to measure his steps by the eye, Soph.:—Pass. to be measured, Hdt., Aesch.
to count, Theocr.
to measure out, dole out, Ar., Dem.:—Mid. to have measured out to one, εὖ μετρεῖσθαι to get good measure, Hes.; τὰ ἄλφιτα μετρούμενοι Dem.
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singularaorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
11 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 11 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 4 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἀλλὰ πῶς λέγει κύριος καταργῶν αὐτόν, μάθετε: Τίς ἐμέτρησεν τὸν οὐρανὸν σπιθαμῇ ἢ τὴν γῆν δρακί;
οὕτως γὰρ εἶπεν: Ἐλεᾶτε, ἵνα ἐλεηθῆτε: ἀφίετε, ἵνα ἀφεθῇ ὑμῖν: ὡς ποιεῖτε, οὕτω ποιηθήσεται ὑμῖν: ὡς δίδοτε, οὕτως δοθήσεται ὑμῖν: ὡς κρίνετε, οὕτως κριθήσεσθε: ὡς χρηστεύεσθε, οὕτως χρηστευθήσεται ὑμῖν: ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, ἐν αὐτῷ μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν.
μνημονεύοντες δὲ ὧν εἶπεν ὁ κύριος διδάσκων: Μὴ κρίνετε, ἵνα μὴ κριθῆτε: ἀφίετε, καὶ ἀφεθήσεται ὑμῖν: ἐλεᾶτε, ἵνα ἐλεηθῆτε: ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, ἀντιμετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν: καὶ ὅτι μακάριοι οἱ πτωχοὶ καὶ οἱ διωκόμενοι ἕνεκεν δικαιοσύνης, ὅτι αὑτῶν ἐστὶν ἡ…
λοιπὸν τῆς τιμῆς πάλιν σοι γράψω, ἐάσας αὐτὸν βαστάξαι, μέτρῳ δὲ τετραχοινίκωι τὸ σίναπι μέτρησον ελ … … ὑπογραφὴν αεφυτοσι, καὶ δήλωσόν μοι πόσαι ἐξέβησαν ἵνα εἰδῶ. ἔπεμψά σοι
μετρημάτων καὶ πόσας λοιπάζεις ἵνα εἰδῶ· ἐὰν δέ τι λοιπάζῃ ἄνευ ἐμῶν γραμμάτων μὴ μετρήσῃς. καὶ εἴ τι δέονται ἔχειν ὑμῶν καὶ τοῦτο δήλωσον. ἐρρῶσθαί σε εὔχομαι. σεσημείωμαι Ἡρωνείνῳ
Σεβαστῶν καὶ γ τῶν κυρίων ἡμῶν Κωνσταντίου καὶ Μαξιμιανοῦ τῶν ἐπιφανεστάτων Καισάρων … κη. ἐμέτρησεν Σαραπίων Ὀννώφρεως διὰ Ἰσιδώρου ὑπὲρ ἀννώνης γενήματος … κριθῆς μέτρα ἑπτὰ ἥμισυ καὶ τούτων
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
πόλις (polis) means 'city' and can refer to an enclosed town or the inhabitants of a city. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in the context of specific cities like Jerusalem or as a general term for urban areas. The word is derived from various dialects and has a rich history in classical literature, indicating both physical locations and the concept of citizenship.
πόλις, -εως, ἡ,
[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for עִיר;]
a city: Mt 2:23, Mk 1:45, Lk 4:29, Jo 4:8, al. mult.; opp. to κῶμαι (κ. καὶ ἀγροί), Mt 9:35 10:11, Mk 6:56, Lk 8:1 13:22; c. nom. propr. in appos. (cl.), Ac 11:5 16:14; c. id. in gen. appos. (Bl., § 35, 5), Ac 8:5, II Pe 2:6; gen., of the region, Lk 1:26 4:31, Jo 4:5; of the inhabitants,
πόλις, -ews, 7, (πέλομαι, to dwell [or rather denoting originally ‘fulness,’ ‘ throng’; allied with Lat. pleo, plebs, ete.; ef. Curtius p. 79 and §374; Vanitek p. 499; (otherwise Fick i. 138)]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for ~y, besides for 7 Pp, WH (8 ate), ete., a city; a. univ.: Mt. ii. 23; Mk.i.45; Lk. iv. 29; Jn. xi.54; Acts vy. 16, and very often in the historical bks. of the N. T. ; κατὰ τὴν πόλιν, through the city [A. V. in; see xara, IT. 1 a.], Acts xxiv. 12; κατὰ πόλιν, κατὰ πόλεις, see κατά, IT. 3 a. a. p. 328"; opp. to κῶμαι, Mt. ix. 35; x.11; Lk. viii. 1; xiii. 22; to κῶμαι καὶ aypot, Mk. vi. 56; ἡ ἰδία πόλις, see ἴδιος, 1 Ὁ. p. 297"; πόλις with the gen. of a pers. one’s native city, Lk. ii. 4,11; Jn.i.44 (45); or the city in which one lives, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. iv. 29; x. 11; Acts xvi. 20; Rev. xvi. 19; Jerusalem is called, on account of the temple erected there, πόλις…
Read the full entry →πόλις. In the second Logia fragment, P Oxy IV. 6542, Blass suggested the restoration ὑμεῖς ἐστὲ mrd[Ats (sc. τοῦ θεοῦ), and is followed by White (Sayzzgs, p. 9). It may be worth while to note that this ancient by-form of πόλις occurs in three ostraca of the reign of Caligula as a proper name, Ostr 380! διαγεγρά(φηκεν) Πτόλις Ψενεν(ούφιος), 7. 3811, 3821, and similarly in PSI IV. 317! (a.p. 95) ᾿Ασκληπιάδης Πτόλιδι τῶι φιλτάτωι χαίρειν. This recalls πολιτάρχης 5 the fact that πτόλεμος also survived in the royal name ἹΠτολεμαῖος. The distributive force which πόλις has in several Lucan passages (Ac 154 a/.) and in Tit 1° is to be set against the very different meaning of the phrase in sundry documents of the new collection from Alexandria (reign of Augustus). Schubart, who edits the documents in BGU IV., notes (Archiv v. p. 38) that in a good many papers relating to the hire of a nurse…
Read the full entry →πόλις (polis) — city.
πόλις,
Epic dialect also πτόλις (found sometimes in Trag. etc., see at {πτόλις}), ἡ: Epic dialect forms, accusative singular πόληα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; genitive πόλιος or πτόλιος, [Refs 8th c.BC+] P.(scanned ?~X ?~X ?~X ¯ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect forms, genitive πόλεως [Refs 6th c.BC+]; dative mostly πόλει, but πόλῑ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative πόλῑς [Refs]: Doric dialect genitive singular πόλιος [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; dative singular πόλι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; dative plural πολίεσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πολίεσσι Foed.Lac. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect πόλιθι [Refs]: Aeolic dialect genitive πόλιος [Refs 7th c.BC+] disyllable (as also in Comedy texts, except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Attic dialect dual πόλη [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—city, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. ἄκρη, ἀκροτάτη, ={ἀκρόπολις}, the citadel, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; which at Athens also was in early times called…
Read the full entry →πόλις
polis
probably from the same as 4171, or perhaps from 4183; a town
(properly, with walls, of greater or less size):--city.
see GREEK for 4183
see GREEK for 4171
πόλις, εως, ἡ
n.f.
a city
πόλις polis 162x
a city, an enclosed and walled town, Mt. 10:5, 11; 11:1; meton. the inhabitants of a city, Mt. 8:34; 10:15; with a gen. of person, or a personal pronoun, the city of any one, the city of one’s birth or residence, Mt. 9:1; Lk. 2:4, 11; ἡ πόλις, the city, κατ’ ἐξοχήν, Jerusalem, Mt. 21:18; 28:11; met. a place of permanent residence, abode, home, Heb. 11:10, 16; 13:14. The frequency count does not include its occurrence in the name Νέαν πόλιν in Acts 16:11
πόλις πόλις, ιος, ἡ, gen. πόλεως dissyll. in attic Poets ionic and doric πόλιος dissyll. in Il. doric πολίεσι:—acc. πόλεις, πόλιας:— a city, Hom., Hes., etc.; πόλις ἄκρη and ἀκροτάτη, ῀ ἀκρόπολις, the citadel, Il.: this at Athens was often called simply πόλις, while the rest of the city was called ἄστυ, Thuc., etc.:—the name of the city was often added in gen., Ἰλίου π., Ἄργους π. the city of . . , Aesch., etc.; also in appos., ἡ Μένδη π. Thuc.
one's city or country, Od., etc.
when πόλις and ἄστυ are joined, the former is the body of citizens, the latter their dwellings, Il.; ὧν πόλις ἀνάριθμος ὄλλυται, where πόλις = a number of citizens, Soph.:—hence,
Read the full entry →Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
sit'-i (`ir, qiryah; polis):
I. THE CANAANITE CITY
1. Origin
2. Extent
3. Villages
4. Sites
5. External Appearance
6. General
II. THE CITY OF THE JEWISH OCCUPATION
1. Tower or Stronghold
2. High Place
3. Broad Place
4. Streets
5. General Characteristics
III. STORE CITIES
IV. LEVITICAL CITIES
LITERATURE
I. The Canaanite City.
1. Origin:
The development of the Canaanite city has been traced by Macalister in his report on the excavation at Gezer (Palestine Exploration Fund Statement, 1904, 108 ff). It originated on the slopes of a bare rocky spur, in which the Neolithic Troglodytes quarried their habitations out of the solid rock, the stones therefrom being used to form a casing to the earthen ramparts, with which the site was afterwards surrounded and which served as a protection against the intrusion of enemies. Later Semitic intruders occupied the site, stone houses were built, and high stone defense…
City
The earliest mention of city-building is that of Enoch, which was built by Cain (Gen. 4:17). After the confusion of tongues, the descendants of Nimrod founded several cities (10:10-12). Next, we have a record of the cities of the Canaanites, Sidon, Gaza, Sodom, etc. (10:12, 19; 11:3, 9; 36:31-39). The earliest description of a city is that of Sodom (19:1-22). Damascus is said to be the oldest existing city in the world. Before the time of Abraham there were cities in Egypt (Num. 13:22). The Israelites in Egypt were employed in building the “treasure cities” of Pithom and Raamses (Ex. 1:11); but it does not seem that they had any cities of their own in Goshen (Gen.…
The towns and cities of Palestine were commonly built on heights, for better security against robbers or invaders. These heights, surrounded by walls, sometimes formed the entire city. In other cases, the citadel alone crowned the hill, around and at the base of which the town was built; and in time of danger the surrounding population all took refuge in the fortified place. Larger towns and cities were often not only defended by strong outer walls, with towers and gates, but by a citadel or castle within these limits-a last resort when the rest of the city was taken, Jud 9:46,51. The "fenced cities" of the Jews, De 3:5, were of various sizes and degrees of strength; some being surrounded by high and thick stone walls, and others by feebler ramparts, often of clay or sun-dried…
165 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 163 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 585 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.
ὅρους τε γῆς πρῶτος ἔθετο καὶ πόλιν ἐδείματο καὶ τείχεσιν ὠχύρωσεν εἰς ταὐτὸν συνελθεῖν τοὺς οἰκείους καταναγκάσας.
πάλιν ὡς ἔμελλεν ἡ πόλις καὶ ὁ ναὸς καὶ ὁ λαὸς Ἰσραὴλ παραδίδοσθαι, ἐφανερώθη.
ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ
Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις Πατοῦτος παστοφορίου ἐντὸς τοῦ
τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν τῶι πατρὶ τοῦ Ὥρου γῆν ἀρουρῶν … ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι Κροκοδίλων πόλεως ἀπὸ σφραγῖδος μιᾶς ἀναγραφομένης εἰς Ψενμ … τῶν πενταρούρων, νότου γῆ Πετεσούχου τοῦ Ἑρμίου
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-DSM — Article · dative · singular · masculinedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-DSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
κάλαμος (kalamos) means a reed and can refer to various uses such as a reed-pipe, a staff, a measuring rod, or a writing instrument. It appears in several New Testament verses, including Matthew 11:7 and Revelation 11:1. The word encompasses both the plant itself and items made from it, reflecting its versatility in ancient contexts.
κάλαμος, -ov, 6, fr. Pind. down, Lat. calamusi.e. a.a reed: Mt. xi. 7; xii. 20 (fr. Is. xlii. 3) ; Lk. vii. 24. b. a staff made of a reed, a reed-staff, (as in 2 K. xviii. 21): Mt. xxvii. 29 sq. 48; Mk. xv. 19, 36. c. a measuring reed or rod: Rey. xi. 1; xxi. 15 sq., (Ezek. xl. 3-6; xlii. 16-19). ἃ. a writer’s reed, a pen: 3 Jn. 13; [see Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 71 sq. ].
κάλαμος. P Tebt II. 37589 (A.D. 140) παραδώσω πάσας τὰς ἀρούρας καθαρὰ (1. —ds) ἀπὸ θρύου καλάμου δί[σ]ης πάσης, “1 will deliver up the arourae free from rushes, reeds, and dirt of all sorts’’ (Edd.): and so P Fay 345 (A.D. 139-40), P Amh II. go” (a.p. 159), 917° (A.D. 159). In place of ἄχυρον, κάλαμος is used for heating purposes according to P Giss I. go 15 (A.D, 212) κάλαμον πρ[ὸδ]ς Td ὑποκαίειν τὰ Badal[vet]a καταφέρουσι. From the close connexion between the cultivation of κάλαμος and vine-growing, to which the papyri witness, GH in their note on P Oxy IV. 7298 (a.p. 137) have shown the probability that a crop of reeds was planted between or under the vines. The collective use of κάλαμος in the above citations and in P Oxy IV. 742° (B.c. 2) παράλαβε παρὰ IId0ov τὸν κάλαμ[ο]ν πανα[ρ]ιθμῶι Kal ἀπόστειλόν plo]. πόσας δέσμας παρείληφες, ‘take over from Pothus the reeds all together, and…
Read the full entry →κάλαμος (kalamos) — reed/stick/pen.
κάλᾰμος [κᾰ], ὁ,
reed, used for thatching or wattling, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; various species, κ. εὐώδης, ἀρωματικός, sweet flag, Acorus Calamus, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. αὐλητικός pole-reed, Arundo Donax, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. εἰλετίας marram, Ammophila arundinacea, [Refs]; κ. ἐπίγειος bush-grass, Calamagrostis epigeios, [Refs]; κ. Ἰνδικός bamboo, Bambusa arundinacea, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. Ἰνδικὸς ὁ ἄρρην male bamboo, Dendrocalamus strictus, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. κύπριος, ={δόναξ}, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; κ. πλόκιμος spear-grass, Phragmites communis, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. Χαρακίας, Arundo Donax, [Refs]
II. applied to various uses,
II.1. reed-pipe, flute, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. fishing-rod, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
κάλαμος
kalamos
or uncertain affinity; a reed (the plant or its stem, or that of a
similar plant); by implication, a pen:--pen, reed.
κάλαμος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
a reed, reed-pen
κάλαμος κ^άλα^μος, ὁ, a reed, larger than the δόναξ, Lat. arundo, being used for thatching houses or even for making the walls, Hdt.; for making mats or crates, id. Hdt., Thuc.
anything made of reed or cane:
a reed-pipe, flute, Pind., Eur.
a fishing-rod, Theocr.
an arrow, Hor.
collectively, of plants, which are neither bush (ὕλη), nor tree (δένδρον), Xen.
a mat of reeds, Plat.
= καλάμη, the stalk of wheat, Xen.
Noun-DSM — Noun · dative · singular · masculinedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-DSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
Reed
(1.) “Paper reeds” (Isa. 19:7; R.V., “reeds”). Heb. ‘aroth, properly green herbage growing in marshy places.
(2.) Heb. kaneh (1 Kings 14:15; Job 40:21; Isa. 19:6), whence the Gr. kanna, a “cane,” a generic name for a reed of any kind.
The reed of Egypt and Palestine is the Arundo donax, which grows to the height of 12 feet, its stalk jointed like the bamboo, “with a magnificent panicle of blossom at the top, and so slender and yielding that it will lie perfectly flat under a gust of wind, and immediately resume its upright position.” It is used to illustrate weakness (2 Kings 18:21;
Under this name may be noticed the following Hebrew words: Agmon occurs in (Job 40:12,16; Isaiah 9:14) (Authorized Version "rush"). There can be no doubt that it denotes some aquatic reed-like plant, probably the Phragmitis communis , which, if it does not occur in Palestine and Egypt, is represented by a very closely-allied species, viz., the Arundo isiaca of Delisle. The drooping panicle of this plant will answer well to the "bowing down the head" of which Isaiah speaks. (Isaiah 58:5) Gnome , translated "rush" and "bulrush" by the Authorized Version, without doubt denotes the celebrated paper-reed of the ancients, Papyrus antiquorum , which formerly was common in some parts of Egypt. The papyrus reed is not now found in Egypt; it grows however, in Syria. Dr. Hooker saw it on the banks of Lake Tiberias, a few miles north of the…
Sometimes a stalk or rod of any plant, as of the hyssop, Mt 27:48 Joh 19:29.
Usually, however, the word reed denotes a reed or cane growing in marshy grounds, Job 40:21 Isa 19:6; slender and fragile, and hence taken as an emblem of weakness, 1Ki 18:21 Isa 36:6 Eze 29:6; and of instability, Mt 11:7. "A bruised reed," Isa 42:3 Mt 12:20, is an emblem of a…
12 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 12 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 17 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
σμύρνης ἐπιλέκτου σίκλους πεντακοσίους καὶ ἴρεως ἴσους, κινναμώμου δὲ καὶ καλάμου, ἔστι δὲ καὶ τοῦτο εἶδος θυμιάματος, ἡμίσειαν τῶν πρότερον ὁλκὴν κεκομμένα δεύειν ἐκέλευσεν, ἐλαίου τε ἐλαΐνου εἴν, μέτρον δʼ ἐστὶ τοῦτο ἐπιχώριον δύο χόας Ἀττικοὺς…
μέρους ἀμπελῶνος ἀναδενδραδικοῦ ἀρούρης μίας τετάρτου ὀγδόου σὺν τῷ ἐπιβάλλοντι τούτῳ ἡμίσει μέρει καλαμίας καλάμου ἑλληνικοῦ καὶ … … τος καὶ ὑποδοχείου ἐφʼ ὧι συκάμινος καὶ ἐν ἑτέρᾳ σφραγῖδι
κλῆρ καθαρὸν ἀπὸ θρύου καλάμου ἀγρώστεως δείσης πάσης
ἐν κώμῃ … καὶ μετὰ τὸν χρόνον παραδώσω τὸ ἔδαφος καθαρὸν ἀπὸ θρύου καὶ καλάμου δείσης πάσης κατα … … … σοι … ι … … τουκαι … ορ
The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.
ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),
prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),
with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.
C. gen.,
of place, answering the question, where?
of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,
ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…
Read the full entry →ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…
Read the full entry →ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.
ἐπί,
Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.
__A WITH GEN.:
__A.I of Place,
__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…
ἐπί
epi
a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,
place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive
case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,
etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,
etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as
(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a
place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf
of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),
with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,
etc. (literally or figuratively).
ἐπί
Prep.
on, to, against, on the basis of, at
ἐπί epi 890x
(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →
ἐπί
on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.
prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.
WITH GEN.:
of Place,
with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.
not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.
ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ
καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης
ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις
στάδιον refers to a measure of length, specifically 600 Greek feet or one-eighth of a Roman mile, and is often associated with a race-course. It appears in several New Testament passages, including Matthew and John, where it denotes both distance and the context of racing. The term is built from the root of ἵστημι, meaning 'to stand' or 'to be fixed,' highlighting its use as a standard measure.
στάδιον, -ου, τό pl., στάδια (Jo 6:19, T), and metapl., στάδιοι (v. B1., § 9, 1),
[in LXX: Da LXX 4:9, Su 37, II Mac 11:5 12:9 ff. * ;]
a stadium, i.e.
a measure of length = 600 Greek feet or 1⁄8 of a Roman mile Mt 14:24 (Rec., WH, txt., R, mg.), Lk 24:13, Jo 6:19 11:18, Re 14:20 21:16, and, this being the length of the Olympic course,
a race-course: I Co 9:24.†
στάδιον, -ov, plur. ra στάδια [ Jn. vi. 19 Tdf.], and of στάδιοι (so [ Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.]; Lk. xxiv. 13; Jn. vi. 19 [not Tdf.]; Rev. xxi. 16 [Εἰς GLWHmrg.]; 2 Mace. xi.5; xii. 10, 29; in the other pass. the gend. is not apparent [see 7df. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 157]; Kriiger 8 19, 2, 1), (STAQ, ἵστημι; hence prop., ‘established,’ that which stands fast, a‘ stated’ distance, a ‘fixed standard’ of length), a s/adium, i. 6. 1. ἃ measure of length comprising 600 Grk. feet, or 625 Roman feet, or 125 Roman paces (Plin. h. n. 2, 23 (21), 85), hence one eighth of a Roman mile [i. 6. 6063 Eng. feet (about 15 m. less than one fifth of a kilom.)]; the space or distance of that length [A.V.a furlong]: [Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.]; Lk. xxiv. 13; Jn. vi. 19; xi. 18; Rey. xiv. 20; xxi. 16. 2. a race-course, i.e. place in which contests in running were held; the one who outstripped the…
Read the full entry →στάδιος (stadios) — stadium.
στάδιος [ᾰ], α, ον,
(ἵστημι) standing fast and firm, σ. ὑσμίνη close fight, fought hand to hand, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐνὶ σταδίῃ (i.e. ὑσμίνῃ) [Refs 8th c.BC+], compare σταδαῖο; [πῖδαξ] σταδίη μένει, of a spring from which no water flows, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]
2. firm, fixed, θάλαμοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]. immobility, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
3. standing upright or straight, σ. χιτών,= ὀρθοστάδιον, an ungirt tunic hanging in straight plaits, [Refs 3rd c.BC+], compare στατό; θώραξ σ. a stiff breastplate, plate-armour, opposed to στρεπτός or ἁλυσιδωτός, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]
II. (ἵστημι A.IV) weighed, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]
στάδιος
stadion
stadios stad'-ee-os
from the base of 2476 (as fixed); a stade or certain measure of
distance; by implication, a stadium or race-course:--furlong, race.
see GREEK for 2476
στάδιον, ου, τό
n.m. & n.n.
one eighth of a Roman mile
στάδιον stadion 7x
pr. a fixed standard of measure; a stadium, the eighth part of a Roman mile, and nearly equal to a furlong, containing 201.45 yards, about 192 meters, Lk. 24:13; Mt. 14:24; Jn. 6:19; 11:18; Rev. 14:20; 21:16; a race-course, a race, 1 Cor. 9:24*
στάδιον pl. στάδια and στάδιοι, but never στάδιος in sg. στῆναι a fixed standard of length, a stade, = 100 ὀργυιαί or 6 πλέθρα, i. e. 600 Greek or 606 3/4 English feet, about 1/8 of a Roman mile, Polyb.: —ἑκατὸν σταδίοισιν ἄριστος "best by a hundred miles, " Ar.; πλεῖν ἢ σταδίῳ λαλίστερος more loquacious than a mile and more, id. Ar.
a race-course (that of Olympia being a stade long), Pind., etc.; ἀγωνίζεσθαι στ. to run a race, Hdt.; στ. νικᾶν to win one, Xen.
Noun-APM — Noun · accusative · plural · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
N-APM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
7 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 7 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
ἐὰν μέντοι πορευόμενος μήτε κάμῃ, ὡς ὑπενδοὺς ὀκλάσαι, μήτε ῥᾳθυμήσῃ, ὡς παρ’ ἑκάτερα ἐκτραπόμενος πλανᾶσθαι τῆς μέσης καὶ εὐθυτενοῦς διαμαρτὼν ὁδοῦ, μιμησάμενος δὲ τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς δρομεῖς τὸ στάδιον ἀπταίστως ἀνύσῃ τοῦ βίου, στεφάνων καὶ ἄθλων ἐπαξίων…
Βάλακος δʼ αὐτὸς ἀφικνεῖται τὸν μάντιν σὺν βασιλικῇ θεραπείᾳ φιλοτίμως ἀγόμενος εἰς ὄρος, ὅπερ ὑπὲρ κεφαλῆς αὐτῶν ἔκειτο τοῦ στρατοπέδου σταδίους ἀπέχον ἑξήκοντα.
ὅρμους ἐφ’ ἡμέρας ρπ καὶ κατάγειν παρὰ μὲν τῶν πλεῖον ἀπεχόντων τόπων ἕως ρκ σταδίων ἐφ’ ἑκάστου ὑποζυγίου πυροῦ ἀρτάβας υπ, ἡμιόνου ψκ, ἵππου ψκ, καμήλου ϡξ
καὶ ἀριστ … α … ειχ καὶ αν … … … … … τῷ σταδίῳ τοῦ … … … ν … μ … ων … ρα
ἄνακαθάρσεως τῶν καμίνων … μεγάλων σελλίων καὶ τῶν μικρῶν … ἄνακαθάρσεως τῶν μέτρων καὶ σταδίων … τῶν γ χαλκοθεσίων … τῶν αὐτῶν γ χαλκοθεσίων
The Greek word δώδεκα (i.e., *dodeka*) means 'twelve' and is used as a numeral. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably referring to the twelve apostles. The word is formed from the components for 'two' and 'ten' and is recognized across different dialects and historical texts.
δώδεκα, οἱ. ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], twelve: Mt. ix. 20; x. 1; [L T Tr WH in Acts xix. 7; xxiv. 11 for δεκαδύο] ; Rev. vii. 5 [R Gu’); xxi. 21, ete. ; of δώδεκα, the twelve apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence: Mk. ix. BITS 35 BIDE Χτ TOUR hts ce-an IZ DING Π.Κ' χΧῚ 9; δδε
δώδεκα (dōdeka) — twelve.
δῠώδεκα,
Ionic dialect, Epic dialect, Lyric poetry; Attic dialect δώδεκα, twelve, in all genders, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—also δυόδεκο, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
δώδεκα
dodeka
from 1417 and 1176; two and ten, i.e. a dozen:--twelve.
see GREEK for 1417
see GREEK for 1176
δώδεκα
Indec.num.
twelve
δώδεκα δύο, δέκα twelve, Hom., etc.: v. δυώδεκα.
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominativenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)
twelv (shenem `asar; dodeka).
See APOSTLE; NUMBER.
77 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 75 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 36 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἐκ γὰρ μιᾶς ἡμέρας τὸ ἓν καὶ ἐκ δυοῖν τὰ δύο καὶ ἐκ τριῶν τὰ τρία καὶ ἐκ μηνὸς τὰ τριάκοντα καὶ ἐξ ἐνιαυτοῦ τὸ ἰσάριθμον ταῖς ἐκ δώδεκα μηνῶν ἡμέραις πλῆθος καὶ ἐξ ἀπείρου χρόνου ὁ ἄπειρος ἀριθμός.
Ἰακώβου φυγὴ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ τὸν ἐκ τἀδελφοῦ φόβον, καὶ ὡς γήμας ἐκεῖ καὶ δώδεκα γεννήσας παῖδας πάλιν εἰς τὴν Χαναναίαν ἐπανῆλθεν.
ἐκεῖνος γάρ, ζήλου ἐμπεσόντος περὶ τῆς ἱερωσύνης καὶ στασιαζουσῶν τῶν φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη, ἐκέλευσεν τοὺς δώδεκα φυλάρχους προσενεγκεῖν αὐτῷ ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατ̓ ὄνομα: καὶ λαβὼν αὐτὰς ἔδησεν καὶ…
ἐν χρήσει, τόκου δραχμιαίου τῇ μνᾷ τὸν μῆνα ἕκαστον, ἔτι δὲ καὶ πυροῦ ἀρτάβας δώδεκα ἕκτον μέτρῳ ἑξαχοινίκῳ ἑρμηνέως Καρανίδος, ὧν καὶ τὴν ἀπόδοσιν ποιησάτω ἡ ὁμολογοῦσα τῶι Πεθεῖ
Νεμεσίων … … … ρος ἀπελευθερο Ἀμμωνίου τοῦ Ἀμμωνίου λαογραφίας κα ἔτους Ἑλληνείου δραχμὰς δώδεκα, γίνονται δραχμαὶ ιβ προσδιαγραφομένων χαλκοῦ ὀβολοὶ ἕξ .
μισθωταὶ ἱερᾶς πύλης Σοήνης διὰ Παχομψᾶχις βοηθοῦ. διέγραψεν Πετοννόφρις Ἁρμάχιος ὑπὲρ μερισμοῦ β δραχμὰς δώδεκα ὀβολοὺς τρεῖς δραχμὰς ιβ τριώβολον ἔτους ϛ Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Παχὼν ιγ.
χιλιάς (chilias) means 'a thousand' and is used in various contexts to denote the number one thousand or a very large quantity. It appears in several New Testament verses, including Luke 14:31 and Acts 4:4. The word is derived from the root for 'thousand' and has been used since ancient times, with references in classical literature as well.
χιλιάς, -άδος, ἡ
(< χίλιοι),
[in LXX for אֶלֶף ;]
the number one thousand, a thousand: Lk 14:31, Ac 4:4, I Co 10:8, Re 5:11 7:4-8 11:13 14:1, 3 21:16.†
χιλιάς, -ddos, ἡ, (χίλιοι), a thousand, the number one thousand: plur., Lk. xiv. 31; Acts iv. 4; 1 Co. x. 8; Rev. v. 11; vii. 4-8; xi. 18; xiv. 1-3; xxi. 16; Sept. for 7x, D278, [Hdt. on.]
χιλιάς. We may note P Oxy IV. 74218 (B.c. 2) (as amended Berichtigungen p. 328) ὅ]ρα ἐμὲ ἠγορακέναι πᾳρ[ὰ ΙΠόθο]υ τὴν χιλίαν δέσμην (δραχμῶν) δίεκάπΊεντε, “see I have bought from Pothus the thousand bundles for fifteen drachmae.” But Witkowski (Z//.? p. 128) understands τὴν χιλίαν δέσμην = ἑκάστην τὴν χιλιάδα δεσμῶν, as meaning “ αἵ fifteen drachmae for a bundle of a thousand.
χιλιάς (chilias) — thousand.
χῑλι-άς, άδος, ἡ:
genitive plural χιλιάδων [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—a thousand, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. generally, large number, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; πολλαὶ χ., of lines of poetry, [Refs]
3. Χιλιάδες, αἱ, title of poem by [Refs 3rd c.BC+]
II. ={χιλιετηρίς}, [Refs]; Ῥωμαϊκὴ χ., title of work by Asinius Quadratus, [Refs 5th c.AD+]
χιλιάς
chilias
from 5507; one thousand ("chiliad"):--thousand.
see GREEK for 5507
χιλιάς, άδος, ἡ
n.f.
a thousand
χιλιάς χι_λιάς, άδος, the number one thousand, a thousand, Hdt., Aesch.; c. gen., πολλαὶ χιλιάδες ταλάντων Hdt.: —generally, a very large number, Theocr.
Noun-GPF — Noun · genitive · plural · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
N-GPF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Feminine
thou'-zand ('eleph; chilioi).
See NUMBER.
23 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 23 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 147 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἦσαν δὲ κατ’ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον τρεῖς μὲν ἱερεῖς, νεωκόρων δὲ πολλαὶ χιλιάδες.
στολὰς δὲ ἱερατικὰς τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσι σὺν ποδήρεσιν ἐπωμίσι καὶ λογίῳ καὶ λίθοις χιλίας·
λέγει γὰρ ἡ γραφή: Μύριαι μυριάδες παρειστήκεισαν αὐτῷ, καὶ χίλιαι χιλιάδες ἐλειτούργουν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἐκέκραγον, Ἅγιος, ἅγιος, ἅγιος κύριος σαβαώθ, πλήρης πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ.
ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστης ἀρτάβης πυροῦ ἧς ἐὰν μὴ ἀποδῶι χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας τετρακοσίας , κριθῆς χιλίας τετρακοσίας , καὶ ἑβδόμην μερίδα τῶν γενημάτων πάντων· τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότω ὁ
ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς χιλίας διακοσίας. προπωλήτρια καὶ βεβαιώτρια τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Τιτῶς ἡ ἀποδομένη ἣν
τὸν ὁμολογοῦντα τὴν συμπεφωνημένην τιμὴν πᾶσαν ἐκ πλήρους παραχρῆμα διὰ χειρὸς ἀργυρίου κεφαλαίου δραχμὰς χιλίας διακοσίας καὶ βεβαιώσειν τὸν ὁμολογοῦντα τὰ κατὰ τὴν πρᾶσιν ταύτην διὰ παντὸς πάσῃ βεβαιώσει.
The Greek word δώδεκα (i.e., *dodeka*) means 'twelve' and is used as a numeral. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably referring to the twelve apostles. The word is formed from the components for 'two' and 'ten' and is recognized across different dialects and historical texts.
δώδεκα, οἱ. ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], twelve: Mt. ix. 20; x. 1; [L T Tr WH in Acts xix. 7; xxiv. 11 for δεκαδύο] ; Rev. vii. 5 [R Gu’); xxi. 21, ete. ; of δώδεκα, the twelve apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence: Mk. ix. BITS 35 BIDE Χτ TOUR hts ce-an IZ DING Π.Κ' χΧῚ 9; δδε
δώδεκα (dōdeka) — twelve.
δῠώδεκα,
Ionic dialect, Epic dialect, Lyric poetry; Attic dialect δώδεκα, twelve, in all genders, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—also δυόδεκο, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
δώδεκα
dodeka
from 1417 and 1176; two and ten, i.e. a dozen:--twelve.
see GREEK for 1417
see GREEK for 1176
δώδεκα
Indec.num.
twelve
δώδεκα δύο, δέκα twelve, Hom., etc.: v. δυώδεκα.
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominativenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)
twelv (shenem `asar; dodeka).
See APOSTLE; NUMBER.
77 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 75 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 36 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἐκ γὰρ μιᾶς ἡμέρας τὸ ἓν καὶ ἐκ δυοῖν τὰ δύο καὶ ἐκ τριῶν τὰ τρία καὶ ἐκ μηνὸς τὰ τριάκοντα καὶ ἐξ ἐνιαυτοῦ τὸ ἰσάριθμον ταῖς ἐκ δώδεκα μηνῶν ἡμέραις πλῆθος καὶ ἐξ ἀπείρου χρόνου ὁ ἄπειρος ἀριθμός.
Ἰακώβου φυγὴ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ τὸν ἐκ τἀδελφοῦ φόβον, καὶ ὡς γήμας ἐκεῖ καὶ δώδεκα γεννήσας παῖδας πάλιν εἰς τὴν Χαναναίαν ἐπανῆλθεν.
ἐκεῖνος γάρ, ζήλου ἐμπεσόντος περὶ τῆς ἱερωσύνης καὶ στασιαζουσῶν τῶν φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη, ἐκέλευσεν τοὺς δώδεκα φυλάρχους προσενεγκεῖν αὐτῷ ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατ̓ ὄνομα: καὶ λαβὼν αὐτὰς ἔδησεν καὶ…
ἐν χρήσει, τόκου δραχμιαίου τῇ μνᾷ τὸν μῆνα ἕκαστον, ἔτι δὲ καὶ πυροῦ ἀρτάβας δώδεκα ἕκτον μέτρῳ ἑξαχοινίκῳ ἑρμηνέως Καρανίδος, ὧν καὶ τὴν ἀπόδοσιν ποιησάτω ἡ ὁμολογοῦσα τῶι Πεθεῖ
Νεμεσίων … … … ρος ἀπελευθερο Ἀμμωνίου τοῦ Ἀμμωνίου λαογραφίας κα ἔτους Ἑλληνείου δραχμὰς δώδεκα, γίνονται δραχμαὶ ιβ προσδιαγραφομένων χαλκοῦ ὀβολοὶ ἕξ .
μισθωταὶ ἱερᾶς πύλης Σοήνης διὰ Παχομψᾶχις βοηθοῦ. διέγραψεν Πετοννόφρις Ἁρμάχιος ὑπὲρ μερισμοῦ β δραχμὰς δώδεκα ὀβολοὺς τρεῖς δραχμὰς ιβ τριώβολον ἔτους ϛ Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Παχὼν ιγ.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word μῆκος (i.mēkos) means 'length' and can refer to physical dimensions, height, or even the length of time or speech. It appears in the New Testament in Ephesians 3:18 and Revelation 21:16, emphasizing the vastness of God's blessings. The lexicons indicate that it can also imply magnitude or greatness in various contexts.
μῆκος, -eos (-ous), τό, fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often for JIS; /ength: Rev. xxi. 16; τὸ πλάτος καὶ μῆκος καὶ βάθος καὶ ὕψος, language used in shadowing forth the greatness, extent, and number of the blessings received from Christ, Eph. iii. 18.
μῆκος, “length,” of space, size, is seen in P Ryl II. 224 (a)® (ii/A.D.) μήκο(υς) πηχῶν [.]: cf. P Lond 755 verso4'(iv/aA.D.) (= III. p. The reference is to time in P Leid W- 8 (ii/iii A.D.) (=II. p. 89) σύρισον ἐπὶ μῆκος, and OG/S 66677 (A.p. 54-68) διὰ τὸ μῆκος τοῦ [xpd ]vo[v. 222f.).
μῆκος (mēkos) — length.
μῆκος,
Doric dialect μᾶκος [Refs 4th c.BC+]: εος, τό:— length, of a club, τόσσον ἔην μῆκος, τόσσον πάχος so large was it in length, so large in thickness, [LXX+8th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ μῆκος lengthwise, ἐπὶ μ. ἔκτασις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μᾶκος ἔδικε threw a long distance, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ μεγάλα μ. great lengths, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__b height, of a wall, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of persons, stature, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μῆκος in height,[Refs 5th c.BC+]
__c generally, μήκει in linear measurement, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; linearity, one-dimensional magnitude, opposed to ἐπίπεδον, βάθος, [Refs]: in Arith., in the first power, [Refs]
μῆκος
mekos
probably akin to 3173; length (literally or figuratively) length.
see GREEK for 3173
μῆκος, ους, τό
n.n.
length
μῆκος mēkos 2x
length, Eph. 3:18; Rev. 21:16*
μῆκος μακρός length, Od.; ἐν μήκει καὶ πλάτει καὶ βάθει Plat.; μ. ὁδοῦ Hdt.; πλοῦ Thuc.: —in pl., τὰ μέγαλα μ. great distances, Plat.
of persons, height, tallness, stature, Od.
of Time, Aesch., etc.:—also μ. λόγου, μ. τῶν λόγων a long speech, id. Aesch.; ἐν μήκει λόγων Thuc.
τὸ μῆκος or μῆκος absol. as adv. in length, Hdt., etc.:— at length, in full, οὐ μῆκος ἀλλὰ σύντομα Soph.
μῆκος in height, Od.
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 70 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
22, 3) διαδέξασθαι τὸν ἀρετῆς κλῆρον φωτὶ τρισσῷ, μνήμῃ τῶν παρεληλυθότων καὶ ἐναργείᾳ τῶν παρόντων καὶ τῇ τῶν μελλόντων ἐλπίδι, τεσσαράκοντα ἐτῶν ἀριθμόν, μῆκος τοσούτου χρόνου, τρίβεται τὴν ἐν κύκλῳ περιάγων καὶ ἀλώμενος ἕνεκα τοῦ πολυτρόπου, τὴν…
λάρνακα τετράστεγον κατασκευάσας πηχῶν τὸ μῆκος τριακοσίων πεντήκοντα δὲ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τριάκοντα τὸ βάθος, εἰς ταύτην σὺν τῇ μητρὶ τῶν παίδων καὶ ταῖς τούτων γυναιξὶν ἀνέβη, τά τε ἄλλα ὅσα πρὸς τὰς χρείας ἐπικουρήσειν αὐτοῖς ἔμελλεν ἐνθέμενος, ζῷά…
δύο σφραγίδων τῶν τόπων νότου εἴσοδος Ὥρου καὶ Πολέμωνος ἥ ἐστιν πήχεις β ἐπὶ μῆκος τῆς εἰσόδου καὶ ἐξόδου Τοθίους Σενθέως καὶ Πόρτιος τοῦ Πόρτου βορρᾶ τῶν β σφραγίδων
τὴν ἐν Φνέβι περσέαν τὴν μεγάλην κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ πλατύμματος· ἔταξα πλάτος πηχῶν ζ, καὶ μῆκος πηχῶν ιδ· καὶ τὰ ἐν τῇ καμάρᾳ ἐν αιρῳ κεῖται· οὐδεὶς ᾕρην· οὐ γὰρ
Ὀξυρύγχων πόλεως Αὐρηλίῳ Δημητρίῳ Θέωνος τοῦ Ἡλιοδώρου ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως ὃν ἔχουσι σκαφοπάκτωνα μῆκος πηχῶν δεκαπέντε αὐτόστολον ἐξηρτισμένον πᾶσι καὶ ναύταις ἱκανοῖς πρὸς ἀνάπλουν εἰς Τεβενοῦτιν ἀπὸ ὅρμου
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
πλάτος is a neuter noun meaning 'breadth' or 'width.' It appears in the New Testament in Ephesians 3:18 and Revelation 21:16, suggesting a sense of great extent. The word is derived from a root meaning 'broad' and can also refer to dimensions in mathematics or metaphorically to a range of variation.
πλάτος, -ous, τό, [ (cf. πλάξ), fr. Hdt. down], breadth : Eph. iii. 18 (on which see μῆκος) ; Rev. xxi. 16; carrying with it the suggestion of great extent, τῆς γῆς, Opp. to the ends or corners of the earth, Rev. xx. 9; (for any, Hab. i. 6).
πλάτος, breadth”: BGU IV. 1157® (B.c. 10) πλάτους πηχῶν ἕνδεκα, and similarly P Oxy II. 24215 (a.p. 77), P Giss I. 42%. (A.D. 117). Cf. πλάτυμμα in BGU I. 1623 (ii/iii ἄλλο πλάτυμμα ἕν χρυσοῦν, and πλάτυσμα, Herodas III. 46. “tile,” in
πλάτος (platos) — width.
πλάτος [ᾰ], εος, τό,
(πλατύς)
__A breadth, width, σώματος [Refs 4th c.BC+] in breadth. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.b in Mathematics texts, breadth, i.e. the second dimension, ἐν μήκει καὶ π. καὶ βάθει [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ π., opposed to κατὰ μῆκος, κατὰ βάθος, [Refs]
__A.2 plane surface, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.3 latitude, whether terrestrial or celestial, [Refs 1st c.BC+]
__A.4 metaphorically, plane, ἐν τῷ ψυχικῷ π. [Refs 5th c.AD+]
__A.5 plane of flat fish, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; flat of the tail, [Refs]; flat part of the body of the fishing-frog, [Refs]
__A.6 extension, breadth of a subject, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
__A.7 ={πλάτας}, Judeich [Refs]
__A.II metaphorically, range of variation, latitude, π. ἔχειν [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
πλάτος
platos
from 4116; width:--breadth.
see GREEK for 4116
πλάτος, ους, τό
n.n.
breadth
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
bredth (rochabh, the root idea being to make wide, spacious): A term of expanse or measurement used of the ark (Ge 6:15); of the tabernacle (Ex 27:13); of Solomon's temple (1Ki 6:2). platos, "breadth," as of the celestial city (Re 21:16). Figuratively, of the comprehensiveness of God's law (Ps 119:96); of the heart (1Ki 4:29, rendered "largeness of heart" English Versions); of God's immeasurable love (Eph 3:18).
4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 31 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
διόπερ οἰκείως εὔχεται τούτῳ προσγενέσθαι πλάτος, ὅπως καὶ ταῖς περὶ ψυχὴν ἀρεταῖς, φρονήσει καὶ σωφροσύνῃ καὶ ἑκάστῃ τῶν ἄλλων, χρῆσθαι δύναιτο καὶ ταῖς σώματος, ὑγείᾳ κὶ εὐαισθησίᾳ δυνάμει τε καὶ ῥώμῃ καὶ ταῖς τούτων συrίενέσιν, ἔτι μέντοι καὶ…
λάρνακα τετράστεγον κατασκευάσας πηχῶν τὸ μῆκος τριακοσίων πεντήκοντα δὲ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τριάκοντα τὸ βάθος, εἰς ταύτην σὺν τῇ μητρὶ τῶν παίδων καὶ ταῖς τούτων γυναιξὶν ἀνέβη, τά τε ἄλλα ὅσα πρὸς τὰς χρείας ἐπικουρήσειν αὐτοῖς ἔμελλεν ἐνθέμενος, ζῷά…
τὴν ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου διώρυγα, τῆς δὲ προωνομασμένης κρεμαστῆς ποτιστρέας οὔσης … … … ρεως πλάτος ἐντὸς περιχώματος τεσσάρων ἐπὶ τὸ θ … … … κος· τὰς δὲ εἰσόδους καὶ
Διονύσου πλάκες … πλάτος ποδῶν τούτων ι … πλάτος ποδῶν … λοι ποδῶν τκϛ ποδῶν η πάχος ποδῶν
ἐκ τοῦ πρὸς ἀπηλιώτην μέρους διʼ ὅλης τῆς αὐλῆς κοινὴν εἴσοδον καὶ ἔξοδον, ἧς πλάτος λιβὸς ἐπʼ ἀπηλιώτην πηχῶν δύο ἡμίσους ἀρχομένης ἀπὸ τῆς ἀπὸ βορρᾶ δημοσίας ὁδοῦ μέχρι
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word ὕψος (*hypsos*) means 'height' and is derived from a root related to elevation. It encompasses both physical height, such as that of heaven, and metaphorical meanings like dignity or exaltation. The New Testament references include Ephesians 3:18, James 1:9, and Revelation 21:16, where it conveys both literal and figurative senses of height.
ὕψος, τους, τό, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept. for DIN, Dp, 732, ete., height: prop. of measure, Eph. iii. 18; Rev. xxi. 16; of place, heaven [A.V. on high], Eph. iv. 8 (fr. Ps. xvii. (Ixviii.) 19); Lk. 1. 78; xxiv. 49; metaph. rank, high station: Jas.i. 9 (Job v.11; 1 Mace. 1, 40; x. 24; ὕψος ἀρετῆς, Plut. Popl. 6).
ὕψος, “height”: P Tebt I. 5:05 (Β.Ὁ: 118) τὰ ἱερὰ ἀνοικοδομεῖν ἕως ὕψους π(ηχῶν) i, “rebuild the temples to the height of τὸ cubits,” CPR I. $89 (iii/A.D.) ἀπὸ ἐδάφους μέχ[ρ]ι παντὸς ὕψους, P Oxy XII. 140916 (a.D. 278) ὥστε ἐπενεχθῆναι eis τὸ τεταγμένον ὕψος τε καὶ πλάτος τὰ χώματα, ““50 that the dykes are raised to the ordained height and breadth” (Edd.), and Sy/ 537 (=°969)48 (B.C. 347-6) ὕψος ἐννέα παλαστῶν ἐκ τοῦ ὑψηλοτέρου.
ὕψος (hupsos) — height.
ὕψος, εος, τό,
(ὕψι) height, ὕψος κρεῖσσον ἐκπηδήματος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὕ. ἔχειν, λαμβάνειν, rise some height, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in height, opposed to μῆκος, εὖρος, πλάτος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐς ὕψος [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. metaphorically, summit, crown, ὕ. ἀμαθίας [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. sublimity, grandeur, τῶν λόγων [Refs 3rd c.AD+]
ὕψος
hupsos
from a derivative of 5228; elevation, i.e. (abstractly) altitude,
(specially), the sky, or (figuratively) dignity:--be exalted, height,
(on) high.
see GREEK for 5228
ὕψος, ους, τό
n.n.
height, heaven
ὕψος hypsos 6x
height, Eph. 3:18; Rev. 21:16; met. exaltation, dignity, eminence, Jas. 1:9; from the Hebrew, the height of heaven, Lk. 1:78; 24:49; Eph. 4:8*
ὕψος ὕψος, ος, εος, τό, ὕψι height, Hdt., attic; ὕ. ἔχειν, λαμβάνειν to rise to some height, Thuc.:—absol. ὕψος, in height, opp. to μῆκος or εὖρος, Hdt.
metaph. the top, summit, crown, Plat.
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 64 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τίς γὰρ οὐκ οἶδεν ὅτι πρῶτον μέν ἐστι σπορὰ καὶ φυτεία, δεύτερον δὲ τῶν σπαρέντων καὶ φυτευθέντων αὔξησις, ἡ μὲν εἰς τὸ κάτω ῥίζας ἀποτείνουσα οἱονεὶ θεμελίους, ἡ δ’ εἰς τὸ ἄνω πρὸς ὕψος αἰρομένων καὶ στελεχουμένων;
ἐλάμβανε δὲ θᾶττον ὕψος ἢ προσεδόκησεν ἄν τις ὑπὸ πολυχειρίας.
ὁδὸς γάρ ἐστιν θανάτου αἰωνίου μετὰ τιμωρίας, ἐν ᾖ ἐστιν τὰ ἀπολλύντα τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτῶν: εἰδωλολατρεία, θρασύτης, ὕψος δυνάμεως, ὑπόκρισις, διπλοκαρδία, μοιχεία, φόνος, ἁρπαγή, ὑπερηφανία, παράβασις, δόλος, κακία, αὐθάδεια, φαρμακεία, μαγεία,…
εἰσρέοντα ὕδατα … ἀπείληφεν ὧν χάριν τα … των δὲ περὶ τὰς δηλουμένας … ὕψει ἀναβάσεως λιμν … μεμερισμένων ὑδάτων ὀλίγων τωι … ὀψίμως κατεφθακέναι διηνα … … ἀπὸ
ἀπὸ νότου μέρους τεσσάρων ἀρουρῶν διῶρυξ … πρὸς τὸ εὐθενεῖν τὰ ὕδατα ταῖς ἐν ὕψει μοίραις … ριν καὶ αὔτως καταδιαιρεῖσθαι τὰ ὕδατα ἐξ ἴσου μέρους· τὰς δὲ ἀποχύσεις
κληρονόμῳ … … ω οἰκίαν ὅλην δίστεγον … … πάντα ἀπʼ ἐδάφους μέχρι παντὸς ὕψους … … βορρᾶ ἡ προκιμένη εἴσοδος … … κοινῆς εἰσόδου καὶ ἐξόδου ψιλ
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-GSF — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
P-GSF Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
The Greek word ἴσος (i.e., *isos*) means 'equal' or 'the same' in various contexts, such as size, quality, or rights. It appears in the New Testament in verses like Acts 11:17 and Matthew 20:12. The word can also be used adverbially, as seen in Revelation 21:16. Some lexicons note a distinction between the forms ἴσος and ἶσος, but this is not universally agreed upon.
ἴσος (not ἶσος [yet often so R*°' G Tr], which is Epic; ef. Bornemann, Scholia in Lue. p. 4; Géttling, Lehre vom Accent p. 305; [Chandler § 406]; ZLipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 24; [L. and S.s. v. fin.; W.52]),-n, τον, equal, in quality or in quantity: ἡ ton δωρεά, the same gift, Acts xi. 17; ἴσαι μαρτυρίαι, agreeing testimonies, Mk. xiv. 56,59; ἴσον ποιεῖν τινά Tu, to make one equal to another, in the payment of wages, Mt. xx. 12; ἑαυτὸν τῷ θεῷ, to claim for one’s self the nature, rank, authority, which belong to God, Jn. v. 18; τὰ ἴσα ἀπολαβεῖν, Lk. vi. 34. The neuters ἴσον and ἴσα are often used adverbially fr. Hom. down (cf. Passow s. ν. p. 1505"; [L. and S.s. v.IV.1]; W.-§ 27, 3 fin.): ἴσα εἶναι (B. § 129, 11), of measurement, Rey. xxi. 16; of state and condition, τῷ θεῷ, Phil. ii. 6 (on which see in…
Read the full entry →ἴσος. In BGU II. 6465 (a.D. 193) ἵνα πάντες ἰδιῆτα[ι] (1. εἰδῆτε) καὶ ταῖς ἴσαις ‘Apfeats ἑορτάση[τα]ι (1. ἑορτάσητε) Wilcken (Chrest. Τ. p. 570) understands the reference to be not to the same eae days, but to the same length of time, viz. 15 days as stated later in the document. “equal cain? quality, cf. P Strass I. 32: (a. D. 261) ζυγὸν δὲ ἐνάγων παρά σοι τὸν ἐπιτηδειότερον αὐτῷ παράσχες, τὸν ἴσον σεαυτῷ ποιήσας εἰς τὰ παρά σοι ἔργα. The neut. is common 85 ἃ subst. = “ΠΟΡΥ,᾿ e.g. P Lond 1222 (A.D. 138) (=III. p. 126), a letter enclosing a copy of a rescript, and | requesting that another Eapy should be given to a certain woman—rd ἴσον δι ὑπηρέτου μεταδοθῆναι t[q] διά [σου δηλ[ουμέϊνῃ Θερμουθαρίωι, and similarly P Tebt II. 3015: (A.D. 190) ἔσχον τούτου [τὸ ἴ]σον ἄχρι ἐξετάσεως, “1 have received a copy of this [a notice of death] for investigation.” For τὰ ἴσα, as in Lk 65", cf. P Ryl…
Read the full entry →ἴσος (isos) — equal.
ἴσος, η, ον,
Epic dialect ἶσος and ἔϊσος (see. below); Cretan dialect, [Refs 4th c.AD+] ϝίσϝος [Refs 5th c.AD+]; later ἵσος [Refs 4th c.BC+]:— equal in size, strength, or number, with dative, κύματα ἶσα ὄρεσσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; frequently of appearance, like, ἶσος ἀναύδῳ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; ἴσος θεοῖσιν Ead.2.1: frequently absolutely, ἴσην.. βίην καὶ κῦδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἶσον θυμὸν ἔχειν to be of like mind, [Refs] adverb, ἶσον ἐμοὶ φρονέουσα [Refs], etc.; ἴσος τινὶ τὸ μέγαθος, ὕψος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μῆκος, τὸ πλάτος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴσα τὸν ἀ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ποτὴν ἴσον equal in flight of song, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἴσον, τό, copy of a document, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τοῖσδ᾽ ἴσας ναῦς (i.e. ταῖς τῶνδε) [Refs 5th c.BC+] the same to me as to you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἴσα ὅσαπερ.. Legal cited in [Refs 5th…
Read the full entry →ἴσος
isos
probably from 1492 (through the idea of seeming); similar (in amount
and kind):--+ agree, as much, equal, like.
see GREEK for 1492
ἴσος, η, ον
Adj
equal, identical
ἴσος ἴσος, η, ον equal to, the same as, c. dat., or absol. equal, like, Hom., etc.:— ἴσα πρὸς ἴσα "measure for measure, " Hdt.; of the mixture of wine with water, ἴσος οἶνος ἴσῳ ὕδατι κεκραμένος Comici; metaph., μηδὲν ἴσον ἴσῳ φέρων not mixing half and half, i. e. not giving tit for tat, Ar.
equally divided, equal, Hom., Soph.:— τὰ ἴσα an equal share, fair measure, Hdt., Soph.:— ἴσαι (sc. ψῆφοι) votes equally divided, Ar.
at Athens, of the equal division of all civic rights, Thuc., etc.:— τὰ ἴσα equal rights, equality, Dem.:—also, ἡ ἴση καὶ ὁμοία (sc. δίκη) Thuc., etc.; ἐπ᾽ ἴσῃ τε καὶ ὁμοίῃ on fair and equal terms, Hdt.
of persons, fair, impartial, Soph., Plat., etc.
Adj-NPN — Adjective · nominative · plural · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
A-NPN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
e'-kwal isos:
In Eze 18:25; 29; 33:17,20, "The way of the Lord is not equal" translates Hebrew yittakhen for takhan, "to weigh," and means "is not adjusted to any fixed standard," "arbitrary," "fitful," and, therefore, "not equitable, fair, or impartial" Septuagint ("is not set straight"). Compare same Hebrew word in 1Sa 2:3, where the Lord is said to `weigh actions.' "Equal," therefore, is what will bear the closest investigation and strictest judgment. In Mt 20:12, "made them equal" means "put them upon the same footing," i.e. regarded their brief service as though it were the very same as our long hours of toil. In Lu 20:36 the context restricts the equality to a…
8 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 23 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
εἰ δ’ ἀρχὴ μὴ παραλαμβάνεται τανῦν ἡ κατὰ χρόνον, εἰκὸς ἂν εἴη μηνύεσθαι τὴν κατ’ ἀριθμόν, ὡς τὸ „ἐν ἀρχῇ ἐποίησεν" ἴσον εἶναι τῷ πρῶτον ἐποίησε τὸν οὐρανόν·
ἥ τε αἰτία τῆς ἀναιρέσεως πολὺ χείρω τὴν πρᾶξιν αὐτοῖς τίθησι, διὰ φθόνον τῶν ἐσομένων ἀγαθῶν αὐτῷ τοῦ ζῆν ἐξαγαγεῖν διεγνωκότων, ὧν τὸ ἴσον ἀπολαύσουσι κοινωνοῦντες αὐτῷ τῆς μετουσίας οὐκ ἀλλοτρίων ὄντων ἀλλʼ οἰκείων·
εἰς τοῦτο ὁμοίους τοὺς τράγους, καλούς, ἴσους, ἵνα, ὅταν ἴδωσιν αὐτὸν τότε ἐρχόμενον, ἐκπλαγῶσιν ἐπὶ τῇ ὁμοιότητι τοῦ τράγου.
ἐπίτιμον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δέκα καὶ τὰ βλάβη ὄντ … καὶ εἰς τὸ δημόσιον τὸ ἴσον, τῆς πράξεως οὔσης τῶι Γαίωι ἔκ τε τῶν μεμισθωμένων καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς καὶ ἐξ
τοι Βουκόλου τοῦ ἱερέως καὶ ἀρχιδικαστοῦ χρηματισμοῦ τὸ ἀντίγραφον ὑπόκειται, καὶ ἐρωτῶ τούτου τὸ ἴσον μεταδοθῆναι τῶι τῆς Τηρεντίας Γεμέλλης νομίμωι ἐπιτρόπωι Ἰγνατίωι Νίγερι διʼ ὑπηρέτου, ἵνʼ εἰδῇ ἀφιστάμενον
Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου περὶ τοῦ μηδὲν περιγεγονέναι ἀπὸ τῆς προκειμένης ἐπιτηρήσεως καὶ ἔσχον τὴν ἴσην ἀποχήν. Μηνίκιος Σαραπίων ἐπιδέδωκα, καθὼς πρόκειται. ἔτους η Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου, Φαμενὼθ λ.
εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.
εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…
Read the full entry →εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…
Read the full entry →εἰμί (eimi) — to be.
εἰμί
(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…
Read the full entry →εἰμί
eimi
the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a
primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,
have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,
2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.
see GREEK for 1488
see GREEK for 1498
see GREEK for 1511
see GREEK for 1527
see GREEK for 2258
see GREEK for 2071
see GREEK for 2070
see GREEK for 2075
see GREEK for 2076
see GREEK for 2771
see GREEK for 2468
see GREEK for 5600
εἰμί
v.
I am, exist
εἰμί eimi 2x
to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6
εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.
of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.
Read the full entry →Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singularpresent active indicative — an action in progress.
V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο